JP2021106893A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of appropriately using light emitting means.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises an LED for emitting light in accordance with a performance which is to be controlled, a sub CPU 201 which can set a brightness value with respect to the LED and an LED control circuit 207. The sub CPU 201 accumulates the brightness value set to the LED (S461), when determining the value accumulated within the predetermined time exceeds a predetermined reference value (S462: YES), restricts the brightness value to be set to the LED in the subsequent processes (S463).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 82

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

A gaming machine that controls an LED by using PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control is disclosed (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-117600

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is a problem that the control of the timing of transmitting the command related to the effect to the effect executing means becomes complicated by executing various effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of simplifying control of transmission timing of complicated commands in production.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The gaming machine of the present invention
It is a gaming machine that can perform a lottery related to a game according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, change the identification information, and control the special gaming state that is advantageous to the player from the lottery result.
A plurality of production execution means that perform operations related to the execution of the production,
Based on a table in which the timing for transmitting information related to the execution of the effect is defined, each of the plurality of effect execution means is provided with a transmission means capable of transmitting information related to the execution of the effect.
As the type of the table, at least a first table group in which one table is used in one effect and a second table group in which a plurality of tables can be used in one effect are provided.
In the table of the first table group, it is possible to specify that the table of the second table group is referred to.
When the information related to the execution of the effect is stored in a predetermined area, the transmission means registers one table of the first table group corresponding to the information related to the execution of the effect, and uses the one table. The table of the second table group to be referred to is registered, and the information related to the execution of the effect is transmitted based on the registered table.
When the tables of the first table group are registered in order corresponding to the effect to be executed, even if the table of the first table group is discarded, the table of the second table group is not discarded. It is characterized by.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information is changed according to the lottery result, and the game is played according to the display result of the identification information being a predetermined special display mode. It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
An effect control means that controls the effect according to the lottery result,
A light emitting means that emits light according to the effect controlled by the effect control means,
A setting means capable of setting a luminance value for the light emitting means is provided.
The setting means accumulates the luminance values set in the light emitting means, and when it is determined that the accumulated value within a predetermined time, which is longer than the time interval of the interrupt processing, exceeds the predetermined reference value, thereafter. Is characterized in that the brightness value set in the light emitting means is limited.

In the above configuration, when the accumulated luminance value within a predetermined time exceeds a predetermined reference value, the luminance value set in the light emitting means is limited, so that the cooling effect of the light emitting means can be expected, and the light emitting means can be used. You will be able to use it properly.

In this game machine,
When the setting means limits the brightness value set in the light emitting means and determines that the accumulated value within a specific time is equal to or less than a specific reference value, the setting means is subsequently set in the light emitting means. It is characterized in that the brightness value is not limited.

In the above configuration, when the accumulated brightness value within a specific time is equal to or less than a specific reference value, it is determined that the light emitting means is cooled, and the limitation of the brightness value set in the light emitting means is released. According to the above configuration, the brightness value of the light emitting means can be restored at an appropriate timing when the light emitting means is cooled, so that the light emitting means can be used more appropriately.

According to the present invention, it is possible to simplify the control of the transmission timing of a complicated command in the production.

It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the game board of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the logo unit and the base door of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the logo unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the logo unit and the base door of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the logo unit and the base door of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the rear. It is a rear view which shows the logo unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the logo unit and the base door of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention in a partially enlarged manner. It is a perspective view which shows the logo unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention partially enlarged from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the logo unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention partially enlarged from the rear. It is a front view which shows the effect display unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the effect display unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the effect display unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the standby state of the shutter device in the effect display unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the standby state of the shutter device in the effect display unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the appearance state of the shutter device in the effect display unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the appearance state of the shutter device in the effect display unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the shutter device in the production display unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention in a partially enlarged manner. It is sectional drawing which shows a part of the shutter device in the production display unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the standby state of the protrusion device in the effect display unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view which shows the standby state of the protrusion device in the effect display unit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the 1st projecting device included in the projecting device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the whole operation of the 1st protrusion device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the drive mechanism included in the 1st protrusion device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the 1st protrusion device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention in a partially enlarged manner. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation in a part of the 1st protrusion apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation in a part of the 1st protrusion apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation in a part of the 1st protrusion apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation in a part of 1st protrusion apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the message transmission of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit random number determination table used in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big hit type determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern table used in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern selection table by game state used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the latter half variation pattern selected in the case of V probability success as an example in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the variation effect table and chance effect table used in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead effect table used in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect pattern determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the high-speed pseudo-ream in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the button continuous hit rank up scenario table used in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the rank-up lottery table used in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on processing which is executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interrupt process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input detection process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening winning place detection processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control main processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process which is executed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving and probability variation number subtraction processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end interval processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern table setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol control processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control circuit main processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part process shown in FIG. 61. It is a flowchart which shows the button input interrupt processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the operation means input process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command transmission processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the message setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the direct table registration process which is executed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the message transmission processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the probabilistic effect control process as the effect mode determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the story & battle effect selection process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the battle effect selection process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the interface notice setting process as the effect mode determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the chance effect setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo continuous effect determination process as the effect mode determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal pseudo continuous effect setting process which is executed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the high-speed pseudo continuous effect setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V effect setting process as the effect mode determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the button pressing effect setting process as the effect mode determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the button continuous hitting effect setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the character button effect setting process which is executed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the safe mode setting process as the effect mode determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect setting process as the effect mode determination process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice effect setting process executed in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating story production and battle production in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating story production and battle production in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big role straddle production in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the interface notice and chance production in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the interface notice in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the promotion lottery which concerns on the background color change in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation timing of the pseudo-ream and the related effect in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect which concerns on V winning in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation pattern which concerns on V winning in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the button pressing effect in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the safe mode concerning LED brightness in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect pattern with the usual reach mode in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating story production and battle production during ST in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various production patterns in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation pattern which concerns on V winning at the time of a big hit, and the modification of the round pattern at the time of a big hit and a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the V effect setting process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Function flow]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in a special symbol game or when it becomes a "hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is easily performed. Become.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for variable display of a special symbol in a special symbol game, and one condition for variable display of a normal symbol in a normal symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The "variable display" referred to in the present specification is a concept that is displayed in a variable manner. For example, a "variable display" that is actually displayed in a variable manner and a "stop display" that is actually stopped and displayed. , Etc. are possible.

Further, in the "variable display", for example, a "derivative display" in which a special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a result of a special symbol game can be performed. That is, in the present specification, the operation from the start of the "variable display" to the "derivative display" is referred to as one "variable display".

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, random numbers (big hit determination random value and symbol determination random value) are extracted and extracted from the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. Each random value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process during the special symbol game shown in FIG. 1).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is memorized by the special symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is memorized, and the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. judge.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and the jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed. After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the jackpot determination described above are referred to, and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined.

Next, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. Determine the effect pattern to be executed along with the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variable display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed. , And the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that the "big hit" has been achieved, the big hit game control process for performing the big hit game is executed. In the jackpot game, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, the big hit game control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or when the big hit game control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, the game state in the normal state, which is different from the jackpot game state, is managed.

As the normal game state, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, a game state in which the probability of being determined as "big hit" increases (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation game state") and a special symbol start winning prize are easily obtained. A game state (hereinafter referred to as a "short-time game state") and the like can be mentioned. After that, the determination process of whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and then various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball starts winning a prize during the variable display of the special symbol, various data (random value for jackpot determination, random value for determining symbol, etc.) acquired at the time of the starting prize are obtained. ) Is put on hold.

That is, if the game ball wins a start prize during the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize is suspended, and after the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed is completed. The variable display of the reserved special symbol is started. In the following, the variable display of the special symbol on hold is also referred to as a "holding ball".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. You can get the reserved ball. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not a reserved ball has been won (whether or not a "big hit" has been won) based on the above-mentioned information on the reserved ball, and further, the determination result is used. It may be provided with a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the above, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random value value is stored (the normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 1). See processing flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. judge.

Next, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the random value extracted from the hit determination counter is referred to, and the hit determination as to whether or not to make a "hit" is performed. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the hit determination is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the determined hit determination result and the variation pattern of the normal symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the result is a "hit". In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "hit", a hit game control process for performing a hit game is executed.

In the winning game control process, the possibility of various winnings described above, in particular, the possibility of winning a special symbol start of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not "hit", the hit game control process is not executed. After that, the determination process of whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and then various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball is determined by the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "hit". The ease with which processing is performed changes.

In this embodiment, as various random number value extraction methods, a soft random number method that generates random number values by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a random number value is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the above-mentioned various random number values may be adopted as the above-mentioned extraction method for various random number values.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[Structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 is in the front direction, the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 is in the rear direction, and the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko game machine 1 is on the left. Direction, the right side when viewed from the front of the pachinko game machine 1 is to the right, the upper side of the pachinko game machine 1 is upward, the lower side of the pachinko game machine 1 is downward, and the pachinko game machine 1 is clockwise when viewed from the front. Is described as a clockwise direction, and conversely, a counterclockwise direction is described as a counterclockwise direction.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main body 2, a base door 3 that is openable and closable to the main body 2, and a glass door that is openable and closable to the base door 3. 4 and.

[Main body]
The main body 2 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 3). The main body 2 is formed of a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is composed of a plate-shaped member having a rectangular outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is arranged in front of the main body 2 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and by rotating the base door 3 around one side end of the main body 2, the main body 2 The opening 2a is opened and closed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base door 3 is provided with a square opening 3a. The opening 3a is formed from a substantially central portion of the base door 3 to an upper region, and is formed in a size that occupies most of the region.

Further, the speaker 11, the game board 12, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the payout unit 16, and the board unit 17 can be attached to the base door 3. A liquid crystal display device 13, a shutter device 8 and a projecting device 9 are attached to the game board 12 as devices related to movable accessories for production described later (see FIGS. 15 and 16). The liquid crystal display device 13, the shutter device 8, and the protrusion device 9 are configured (integrated, combined, installed) as an effect display unit 10 described later.

The speaker 11 is arranged at the upper part (near the upper end portion) of the base door 3. The game board 12 is arranged in front of the base door 3 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and is arranged so as to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

The game board 12 is composed of a plate-shaped resin member having light transmission. As the light-transmitting resin, for example, an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a methacrylic resin, or the like can be used.

Further, on the front surface of the game board 12 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko game machine 1), a game area 12a on which the game ball launched from the launching device 15 rolls is formed. The game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail (specifically, an outer rail 41a (not shown) surrounding the opening 4a of the glass door 4 described later), and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially circular.

Further, a plurality of game nails (not shown) are driven into the game area 12a. The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 5 (a).

The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 13a is set so as to occupy a part of the surface of the game board 12. The size of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 may be a size that occupies the entire surface area of the game board 12.

In the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, various images such as an identification symbol (decorative symbol) for effect, an effect image, and a decorative image are displayed. The player can visually recognize various images displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 via the game board 12.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 13 is used as the display device, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the liquid crystal display device 13, for example, a plasma display, a rear projection display, or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). ) A display device such as a display may be applied.

Further, a spacer 19 is provided on the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1). The spacer 19 is provided between the back surface of the gaming board 12 (the surface on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 13 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). It forms a space that serves as a flow path for a gaming ball that rolls in the gaming area 12a.

The spacer 19 is made of a light-transmitting material. The present invention is not limited to this, and the spacer 19 may be, for example, partially formed of a light-transmitting material or a non-light-transmitting material. ..

The plate unit 14 is arranged below the game board 12. The plate unit 14 has an upper plate 21 and a lower plate 22 arranged below the upper plate 21. A payout port 21a and a payout port 22a for lending a game ball and paying out a game ball (prize ball) are formed on the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively.

When the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout port 21a or the payout port 22a, and the discharged game balls are stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively. Further, the game ball stored in the upper plate 21 is launched into the game area 12a by the launching device 15.

Further, the plate unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. The effect button 23 is mounted on the upper plate 21. Further, a jog dial 24 is rotatably attached to the peripheral edge of the effect button 23 with respect to the effect button 23.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a predetermined effect function performed by using at least one of the effect button 23 and the jog dial 24, and when performing a predetermined effect, the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 An image prompting the operation of at least one of the effect button 23 and the jog dial 24 is displayed.

The launcher 15 is arranged in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The launching device 15 includes a launching handle 25 that can be operated by the player, and a panel body 26 that engages with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14. The launch handle 25 is arranged on the front surface side of the panel body 26 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 26.

Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a solenoid actuator for controlling the firing operation of the game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 26. Further, although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a touch sensor is provided on the peripheral edge of the launch handle 25, and a launch volume is provided inside the launch handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25, and changes the electric power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player's hand comes into contact with the touch sensor of the firing handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. As a result, it is detected that the player holds the launch handle 25, and the game ball can be launched by the solenoid actuator.

Then, when the player grasps the launch handle 25 and rotates it clockwise (clockwise when viewed from the player side), the resistance value of the launch volume changes according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 25. , The power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are sequentially launched, and the launched game balls are guided by the guide rail and discharged to the game area 12a of the game board 12.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a launch stop button is provided on the side portion of the launch handle 25. The launch stop button is a button provided to stop the launch of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. When the player presses the launch stop button, the launch of the game ball is stopped even in the state where the launch handle 25 is gripped and rotated.

The payout unit 16 and the substrate unit 17 are arranged on the back side of the base door 3. A game ball is supplied to the payout unit 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout unit 16 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 based on the establishment of the payout condition.

The board unit 17 has various control boards. The various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70, a sub control circuit 200, a payout / launch control circuit 300, and the like, which will be described later (see FIG. 33, which will be described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is formed in a rectangular frame shape. Further, the glass door 4 is arranged on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size of covering the game board 12. A logo unit 58 is provided on the front surface of the glass door 4 in an upper region facing the speaker 11. Here, the logo unit 58 of the present embodiment constitutes the decorative unit of the present invention.

Further, in the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening 4a having a size that exposes at least the game area 12a is formed in the area of the game board 12 facing the game area 12a. A protective glass 28 having light transmission is attached to the opening 4a of the glass door 4, whereby the opening 4a is closed.

Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is arranged so as to face at least the game area 12a of the game board 12. As shown in FIG. 2, illumination covers 58A to 58C are provided at both left and right ends and lower ends of the opening 4a of the glass door 4. LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) 59A to 59C (see FIG. 33) are provided on the rear surface of the lighting covers 58A to 58C. The LEDs 59A to 59C are controlled so as to light or blink in conjunction with the operation of the shutter device 8 and the protrusion device 9, which will be described later, the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, the effect button, and the light emission of the illumination covers 58A and 58B. Will be done.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (a). FIG. 5A is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 12.

On the front surface of the game board 12, as shown in FIG. 5A, a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector 43, a first starting port 44, a second starting port 45, and an ordinary electric accessory 46 are provided. Is provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, general winning openings 51 and 52, a first large winning opening 53, a second large winning opening 54, an out opening 55, and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are provided.

Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, a bulge cover (not shown) is provided near the second large winning opening 54, and the bulge cover bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 12. Hereinafter, the front side of the game board 12 represents the player side with respect to the game board 12, and the rear side of the game board 12 represents the side opposite to the player side with respect to the game board 12. Further, the right side and the left side with respect to the game board 12 represent the right side and the left side when the game board 12 is viewed from the front. Therefore, when the game board 12 is viewed from the rear, the right side of the game board 12 is the left side and the left side of the game board 12 is the right side on the paper.

Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, on the lower right side thereof, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special A symbol holding display device 65 is provided (see FIG. 33, omitting the reference numerals in FIG. 5A).

In this embodiment, a notification LED that lights up when the result of the stop display of the special symbol is "big hit", a round number display LED that displays the number of rounds during the big hit game, and the like may be provided.

[Various components of the game area]
The guide rail 41 extends in an arc shape so as to partition the game area 12a, and includes an outer rail 41a (shown by a broken line in FIG. 5A) surrounding the opening 4a of the glass door 4 and the outer rail 41a. It is composed of an inner rail 41b which is arranged inside (inner peripheral side) and extends in an arc shape.

The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are arranged so as to face each other near the left end portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, whereby the launching device is placed between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b. A guide path 41c is formed to guide the game ball launched by the 15 to the upper part of the game area 12a.

Further, at the tip of the inner rail 41b located on the upper left side of the game area 12a, a ball discharge port 41d is formed by the tip of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a facing the tip of the inner rail 41b. Then, a ball return prevention piece 42 is provided at the tip of the inner rail 41b so as to close the ball discharge port 41d.

The ball return prevention piece 42 prevents the game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d into the game area 12a from passing through the ball discharge port 41d again and entering the guide path 41c.

The game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d flows down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 12a such as a plurality of game nails, the first start port 44, the second start port 45, etc., and changes the traveling direction of the upper part of the game area 12a. It flows down from to the bottom.

A display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided at substantially the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the game ball does not pass over the area overlapping the display area 13a in the game area 12a.

The ball passage detector 43 is arranged near the upper part of the first winning opening 53 on the right side of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The ball passage detector 43 is provided with a passing ball sensor 43a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a passing game ball. Further, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the game is a "hit" of the normal symbol game, and the variation display of the normal symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

The first starting port 44 is arranged below the display area 13a, and the second starting port 45 is arranged below the first starting port 44. The first starting port 44 and the second starting port 45 are made of members capable of accepting a game ball.

Hereinafter, the entry or passage of the game ball into or passing through the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 is referred to as "winning". Then, when the game balls win the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out.

Further, when the game ball enters the first starting port 44, a lottery for whether or not it is a "big hit" and a lottery for whether or not it is a "small hit" are performed, and based on the result of the lottery. The variable display of the first special symbol is started. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 45, a lottery for whether or not it is a "big hit" is performed, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started based on the result of the lottery. The first special symbol and the second special symbol may be referred to as special figure 1 and special figure 2, respectively.

The first starting port 44 is provided with a first starting port winning ball sensor 44a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a winning game ball. Further, the second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball sensor 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 45. The game balls that have won the first start port 44 and the second start port 45 are conveyed to the game ball collection section (not shown) through the collection port (not shown) provided on the game board 12. ..

The ordinary electric accessory 46 is provided at the second starting port 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 is a blade-shaped member that opens and closes so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is an opening that enables the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 45. It is configured to be switchable between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 is opened and closed by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a (see FIG. 33 described later).

In the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. May be good. Further, the ordinary electric accessory 46 is not limited to the one that operates the blade-shaped member so as to open and close in the front-rear direction. It may be a tulip-shaped member or a tongue-shaped member that opens and closes the starting port by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

The general winning opening 51 is arranged near the lower left portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side. Further, the general winning opening 52 is arranged on the right side of the ball passing detector 43, and is arranged near the lower right portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side.

The general winning opening 51 and the general winning opening 52 are made of members capable of accepting a game ball. In the following, the entry or passage of a game ball into or passing through the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out.

The general winning opening 51 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 51a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a winning game ball. Further, the general winning opening 52 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 52a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 52.

The first winning opening 53 and the second winning opening 54 are arranged below the ball passage detector 43 and to the right of the first starting opening 44 and the first starting opening 45. The first large winning opening 53 and the second large winning opening 54 are arranged in the vertical direction along the flow path of the game ball, and the first large winning opening 53 is arranged above the second large winning opening 54.

Both the first prize opening 53 and the second prize opening 54 are so-called attacker type opening / closing devices, and are openable / closable shutters 53a and 54a and solenoid actuators for driving these shutters 53a and 54a (see the figure below). It has a first winning opening solenoid 53b and a second winning opening solenoid 54b) in 33.

Each of the first grand prize opening 53 and the second grand winning opening 54 accepts the game ball when the corresponding shutters 53a and 54a are open (open state), and the shutter is closed (closed state). At that time, the game ball is not accepted.

In the following, the entry or passage of a game ball into or passing through the first prize opening 53 or the second prize opening 54 is also referred to as "winning". When a game ball wins in the first large winning opening 53, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second large winning opening 54, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

Further, the first large winning opening 53 is provided with a count sensor 53c (see FIG. 33 described later) for counting the winning game balls. Further, the second large winning opening 54 is provided with a count sensor 54c (see FIG. 5A and FIG. 33 described later) for counting the winning game balls.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 53 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large width dimension so that a plurality of game balls can be won at the same time. The second large winning opening 54 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of a bulging cover (not shown) as an opening having a relatively small size so that one game ball can win one by one.

The shutter 53a corresponding to the first large winning opening 53 switches the first large winning opening 53 to the open state or the closed state by opening and closing the game board 1 so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction. It is arranged so as to cover the first large winning opening 53 in the closed state. That is, the shutter 53a changes between an open state in which the game ball can be won in the first prize opening 53 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. (See FIG. 33 below).

The shutter 54a corresponding to the second large winning opening 54 switches the second large winning opening 54 to an open state or a closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and the second large winning opening 54 is in the closed state. It is arranged so as to cover the winning opening 54. That is, the shutter 54a changes between an open state in which the game ball can win the second prize opening 54 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. (See FIG. 33 below).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, inside the bulging cover, a specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38A through which the game ball that has passed through the second special winning opening 54 and detected by the count sensor 54c can pass can pass. 38B is provided. The ball passage of the game ball from the second special winning opening 54 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the bulge cover. The game ball that has won the second large winning opening 54 is guided to the back of the game board 1 and collected after passing through either the specific area 38A or the non-specific area 38B. A count sensor 54c is arranged at an intermediate position of the ball passage from the second large winning opening 54 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. A specific area sensor 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the passage of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area sensor 380A. A non-specific area sensor 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area sensor 380B. Further, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific region 38A is provided in the vicinity of the specific region 38A.

The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A between the open state and the closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 is subjected to the displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 33 described later) so as to change between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific region 38A and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to pass. Driven. When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the game ball that cannot pass through the specific area 38A will pass through the non-specific area 38B.

In the following, passing the game ball through the specific area 38A may be referred to as "V winning". Further, the second large winning opening 54 provided with the specific area 38A may be referred to as a “V attacker”. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the V prize is successfully completed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 shifts to the probabilistic gaming state. Therefore, the V prize may be referred to as "V certainty". The displacement member 39 may be referred to as "V tongue".

The configuration for realizing the V prize may be the configuration shown in FIG. 5 (b). That is, a ball passage for guiding the game ball downward is formed inside the second special winning opening 54, and a specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B are formed at the lower end of the ball passage so as to be adjacent to the left and right. Is provided. A count sensor 54c is arranged at a position where the ball passage is entered from the second large winning opening 54. A specific area sensor 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V prize of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area sensor 380A. A non-specific area sensor 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area sensor 380B. A displacement member 39 that can rotate left and right is provided in the vicinity of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B in the ball passage. The posture shown by the solid line of the displacement member 39 is the open posture after displacement, and the position shown by the virtual line is the normal closed posture.

The displacement member 39 switches the specific region 38A to an open state or a closed state. When the displacement member 39 is in the open posture shown by the solid line, the specific area 38A is set to the open state, and the V prize of the game ball to the specific area 38A is easily set. At this time, the displacement member 39 guides the game ball to the specific area 38A on the right side of the ball passage. As a result, the game ball guided from the second large winning opening 54 to the ball passage becomes a V winning by passing through the specific area 38A. Further, when the displacement member 39 is in the closed posture indicated by the virtual line, the specific area 38A is closed, the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is impossible or difficult, and the ball passage is in a closed state. Guide the game ball to the non-specific area 38B on the left side. As a result, the game ball guided from the second large winning opening 54 to the ball passage passes through the non-specific area 38B without passing through the specific area 38A. Even with such a configuration, V winning can be realized. When the count sensor 54c detects the passage of the game ball, the prize ball is paid out, and based on the signals from the count sensor 54c, the specific area sensor 380A, and the non-specific area sensor 380B, the game ball is transmitted from the second large winning opening 54. May be determined (whether or not the game ball remains in the second prize opening 54).

The out port 55 is provided at the bottom of the game area 12a. The out opening 55 accepts a game ball that has not won any of the first starting opening 44, the second starting opening 45, the general winning openings 51 and 52, the first major winning opening 53, and the second major winning opening 54. ..

When the arrangement of the various constituent members in the game area 12a of the present embodiment is as shown in FIG. 5A, when the game ball is driven into the area on the right side of the game area 12a by the player (so-called right-handed). Case), the game ball is guided to the second starting port 45 by a game nail or the like.

In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first starting port 44. In the present embodiment, the person who wins the second start opening 45 is more likely to receive the lottery of the "big hit" which is advantageous for the player than the case where the first start opening 44 is won.

Therefore, in the so-called "short-time game state" in which it is relatively easy to win a prize in the second starting port 45, there is a possibility of winning a prize in the first starting port 44 by hitting right (a game disadvantageous to the player). The possibility of becoming a state) can be reduced.

The bulge cover is provided below the first large winning opening 53, and the upper surface of the bulge cover is formed as an inclined surface. This inclined surface is inclined downward to the left from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the player side. The inclined surface guides the game ball flowing down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a to the second large winning opening 54, and the game ball rolling on the inclined surface collides with a rib or the like (not shown). Then, the speed of the game ball is reduced, and the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second large winning opening 54 in which the shutter 54a is in the open state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, illumination covers 58E to 58H are provided around the display area 13a of the game board 12, and LEDs 59e to 59h are provided on the rear surface of the illumination covers 58E to 58H (FIG. 5A). 33) is provided. The illumination covers 58E to 58H perform an effect display related to the shutter device 8 and the protrusion device 9, which will be described later, by lighting or blinking the LEDs 59e to 59h.

[Logo unit]
6 to 13 show the logo unit 58. As shown in FIG. 6, the logo unit 58 is attached to a conductive metal frame member 111. The frame member 111 is attached around the front side of the base door 3. As a result, the logo unit 58 is arranged so as to project forward of the gaming machine 1.

As is well shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the logo unit 58 includes a front cover 580, a top cover 581, a plurality of side covers 582A to 582D, a base member 583, a plurality of substrate support members 584, a plurality of LED substrates 585, and the like. It has a plurality of light guide plates 586.

The front cover 580 has a front cover main body 580A and a plurality of outer lenses 580B. The front cover main body 580A has conductivity by, for example, gold-plating or silver-plating the surface. The plurality of outer lenses 580B are for illuminating logos such as model names one by one, and are provided so as to be arranged in the left-right direction along the front surface of the front cover main body 580A. The outer lens 580B has translucency so as to guide the light emitted from the corresponding LED substrate 585 behind the light guide plate 586 to the outside. Further, the outer lens 580B is assumed to be a non-conductive translucent member such as general plastic or glass. For example, a conductive translucent paint may be applied to the surface or translucent. It is also possible to use a conductive member having properties (such as plastic having conductivity). Further, the front cover main body 580A may be made conductive, for example, by subjecting the surface to an aluminum vapor deposition treatment. At that time, it is also possible to adjust the electrical conductivity (conductivity, conductive amount) by adjusting the vapor deposition amount of aluminum.

The top cover 581 is attached to the upper part of the frame member 111 integrally with the front cover 580. The front cover main body 580A of the front cover 580 is fixed to the upper portion of the top cover 581 via a plurality of screws 581A. A so-called snap-fit type locking cap 581B that is difficult to reattach and detach is fitted to the portion of the top cover 581 to which the screw 581A is fixed. As a result, once the locking cap 581B is fitted, it is difficult for the top cover 581 to remove the locking cap 581B and tighten and loosen the screw 581A, making it virtually inseparable from the front cover 580. Is integrated. Similar to the front cover main body 580A, such a top cover 581 has conductivity by, for example, gold-plating or silver-plating the surface. The top cover 581 may also be made conductive, for example, by subjecting the surface to an aluminum vapor deposition treatment.

Such a front cover 580 and a top cover 581 can be integrally handled as an assembly part of the logo unit 58 by interconnecting via a locking cap 581B and a screw 581A which are difficult to be reattached, while being connected to each other. When the stop caps 581B are fitted, they cannot be easily separated from each other, so that it is possible to effectively prevent the logo unit 58 from entering the inside due to fraudulent acts or the like.

The side covers 582A and 582B are fixed to the left end portion of the front cover 580 when the front cover 580 is viewed from the front, and are arranged so as to overlap the upper end of the illumination cover 58A. The side cover 582A is located above the side cover 582B and has translucency so as to guide the light from the LED 59A corresponding to the illumination cover 58A to the outside. The side cover 582A is non-conductive because it has not been plated or the like in order to obtain good translucency. Like the front cover main body 580A and the top cover 581, the side cover 582B has conductivity by, for example, gold-plating or silver-plating the surface. The side covers 582C and 582D are fixed to the right end portion of the front cover 580 when the front cover 580 is viewed from the front, and are arranged so as to overlap the upper end of the illumination cover 58B. The side cover 582C is located above the side cover 582D and has translucency so as to guide the light from the LED 59B corresponding to the illumination cover 58B to the outside. The side cover 582C is non-conductive because it has not been plated or the like in order to obtain good translucency. Like the front cover main body 580A and the top cover 581, the side cover 582D has conductivity by, for example, gold-plating or silver-plating the surface. Note that FIG. 9 shows a state in which the side covers 582C and 582D are disassembled. The fixed structure of the side cover 582C will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. Such side covers 582B and 582D may be non-conductive members as resin covers, or may be members having lower conductivity than those subjected to plating treatment. Further, the side cover 582D may be made conductive, for example, by subjecting the surface to an aluminum vapor deposition treatment.

A plurality of substrate support members 584 are attached to the base member 583. A board support member 584 is supported on the left and right ends of the base member 583 so as to project outward from the left and right ends, and a speaker holder 110A and a speaker cover 110B are arranged behind the board support member 584. The speaker holder 110A is integrally attached to the upper part of the frame member 111 together with the speaker 11. The speaker 11 is held by the speaker holder 110A so as not to directly touch the frame member 111. The speaker cover 110B has a mesh portion that covers the front of the speaker 11 and a side surface portion that contacts the speaker holder 110A so as to cover the front surface of the speaker 11, and is incorporated in the logo unit 58 so as to cover the front surface of the speaker 11 and the speaker holder 110A. The mesh portion of the speaker cover 110B is not conductive, while the remaining side surface portions are conductive, for example, by plating the surface. Such a logo unit 58 is attached to the upper part of the frame member 111. The speaker holder 110A is basically a non-conductive member. For example, the portion that is in contact with or close to the speaker 11 is non-conductive, while the portion that is in contact with or close to the speaker cover 110B is conductive. May have. Further, the frame member 111 is provided with a non-conductive cover on the front surface and a conductive frame on the rear surface. A predetermined space is provided between the frame member 111 and the speaker 11 by the non-conductive cover on the front surface side of the frame member 111 and the speaker holder 110A. As a result, static electricity is prevented from coming into the speaker 11 from the frame member 111. Further, the mesh portion of the speaker holder 110A and the speaker cover 110B does not have conductivity, while the side surface portion of the speaker cover 110B in contact with the speaker holder 110A has conductivity. Although conductive, a non-conductive cover made of resin or plastic is arranged on the front surface side of the frame member 111. Therefore, all the members that are close to or in contact with the speaker 11 are non-conductive members, which also effectively prevents the inflow of static electricity.

The plurality of substrate support members 584 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the plurality of outer lenses 580B, and the bases are fixed so that the LED substrate 585 and the light guide plate 586 face different postures in front of each other. The mounting angle with respect to the member 583 is slightly different.

A plurality of LEDs 59 are discretely provided on each of the plurality of LED substrates 585. The light guide plate 586 is arranged in front of the LED substrate 585 so as to guide the light of each LED 59 to the corresponding outer lens 580B, and is fixed to the substrate support member 584 integrally with the LED substrate 585.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, a board support member 584 is arranged on the rear surface of the front cover main body 580A, and screws are fixed on the rear surface of the board support member 584 for directly screwing the side cover 582C. A portion 580Aa is provided. Further, on the rear surface of the front cover main body 580A, a screw fixing portion 580Ab for screwing the conductive member 582E with the side cover 582C sandwiched is provided. The side cover 582C is provided with a screw hole portion 582Ca corresponding to the screw fixing portion 580Aa and an insertion port 582Cb into which the tip of the screw fixing portion 580Ab can be inserted. The conductive member 582E is provided with a screw fixing portion 582Ea for screwing to the frame member 111.

In the side cover 582C, the screw hole portion 582Ca is directly fixed to the screw fixing portion 580Aa by the screw 582Cc while exposing the tip of the screw fixing portion 580Ab to the insertion port 582Cb. The conductive member 582E is fixed to the screw fixing portion 580Ab exposed from the insertion port 582Cb by the screw 582Eb. As a result, the side cover 582C is fixed in a state of being sandwiched between the front cover main body 580A and the substrate support member 584 and the conductive member 582E.

In the state where the side cover 582C is fixed to the front cover 580 as described above, the conductive member 582E is fixed to the frame member 111 by a screw (not shown) with the screw fixing portion 582Ea. Further, one end of a ground wire (not shown) is connected to the screw 582Eb to which the conductive member 582E is fixed. The other end of the ground wire is connected to an appropriate portion of the frame member 111. As a result, the front cover 580 is electrically connected to the frame member 111 through the conductive member 582E and the ground wire, although the right end thereof overlaps with the non-conductive and translucent side cover 582C. Although not particularly shown, the left end portion of the front cover main body 580A when viewed from the front is also electrically connected to the frame member 111 via the conductive member and the ground wire while fixing the side cover 582A as well as the right end portion.

As a result, the assembly parts in which the front cover 580, the top cover 581, and the side covers 582A to 582D are paired can be used as decorative parts without impairing the visibility of light and the ease of attachment / detachment to / from the frame member 111. It can be handled integrally without impairing its function. Further, for example, mainly in the front cover 580, the charged static electricity is efficiently removed by being guided to the frame member 111 through the conductive member 582E and the ground wire. Therefore, even if a player or the like touches the front cover 580, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling electrically uncomfortable. In addition, since static electricity is efficiently removed, it is possible to prevent static electricity from flying to the connection unit (board) provided on the base member 583, the LED board 585, etc., and to prevent static electricity failure or circuit destruction in the electric circuit of each board. Can be prevented.

Further, the non-conductive speaker holder 110A holding the speaker 11 has a side surface portion in contact with the conductive speaker cover 110B, and the speaker cover 110B has a plurality of screw fixing portions screwed to the rear portion of the base member 583. .. In particular, one end of a ground wire (not shown) is connected to the screw fixing portion 110C of the speaker cover 110B via a screw. The other end of the ground wire is connected to an appropriate portion of the frame member 111. As a result, even in the speaker cover 110B, which is relatively close to the speaker 11, the charged static electricity is guided from the screw fixing portion 110C to the frame member 111 through the ground wire, and the static electricity is efficiently removed. That is, although a large number of electrical components are arranged inside the logo unit 58, static electricity is likely to be charged in the vicinity thereof, but such static electricity is efficiently removed not only from the conductive member 582E but also from the periphery of the speaker 11. Therefore, the static electricity generated in the entire logo unit 58 can be sufficiently eliminated.

Although not particularly shown, an LED substrate on which a plurality of LEDs 59A to 59C are mounted is also provided on the back surface of the illumination covers 58A to 58C as in FIG. The illuminated covers 58A to 58C have conductivity by, for example, subjecting the surface to an aluminum vapor deposition treatment or a plating treatment, and are attached to the metal frame member 111. As a result, even in the illumination covers 58A to 58C, the charged static electricity is guided to the frame member 111 and is efficiently removed. Therefore, even if a player or the like touches the illuminated covers 58A to 58C, it is possible to prevent the electric decoration from being electrically unpleasant. In addition, since static electricity is efficiently removed, it is possible to prevent static electricity from flying to the LED boards provided corresponding to the illumination covers 58A to 58C, and to prevent static electricity damage and destruction of the electric circuit of each board. be able to.

[Production display unit]
Next, the effect display unit 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. 14 is a front view showing the effect display unit 10, FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing the effect display unit 10, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view showing the effect display unit 10.

As shown in FIG. 16, the effect display unit 10 includes a liquid crystal display device 13, a shutter device 8, and a protrusion device 9 in the order from the rear to the front. The projecting device 9 can be disassembled into a first projecting device 9A and a second projecting device 9B, and a second projecting device 9B is arranged in front of the first projecting device 9A. As shown in FIG. 15, the effect display unit 10 is attached to the back surface of the game board 12.

The liquid crystal display device 13 is supported on the back surface of the frame member 130 having the opening 130a. The display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is arranged so as to face the opening 130a, and is visible to the player in front through the light-transmitting game board 12.

The shutter device 8 is provided at the innermost part on the front surface side of the frame member 130. The shutter device 8 is arranged so as not to overlap (part or all) with the opening 130a in the standby state (non-operating state), and in the operating state, a pair of movable units 81 described later are opened from both left and right sides. It is configured to move toward the center of the portion 130a. As a result, the shutter device 8 performs a predetermined effect operation so as to cover the effect image displayed in the display area 13a. The shutter device 8 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22.

The first protruding device 9A is provided between the shutter device 8 and the second protruding device 9B. The first projecting device 9A is arranged so that a plurality of projecting units 91A to 91G, which will be described later, are partially exposed from the periphery of the opening 130a in the standby state (non-operating state), and a plurality of projecting units 91A to 91G are arranged so as to be partially exposed from the periphery of the opening 130a in the operating state. The protruding units 91A to 91G are configured to protrude more toward the center of the opening 130a. As a result, the first projecting device 9A performs a predetermined effect operation so as to cover the effect image displayed in the display area 13a. The first projecting device 9A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. As shown in FIG. 23 and the like, the projecting units 91A to 91G are arranged so as to be partially exposed from the periphery of the barrier portion 130a, but the projecting units 91A to 91G are arranged so as not to be exposed at all. It may be exposed, or the whole may be exposed. Further, the exposure here means that it is not difficult to see, but for example, when the decorative member included in the projecting device as an effect device has translucency or light emission, the decorative member is used. As long as the light emission can be confirmed regardless of the position and the content of the effect can be conveyed, it is not necessary to move to the position where the decorative member is exposed. That is, as the member that performs the effect operation, the visibility changes such that it is visually recognized in the first mode in the standby state and is visually recognized in the second mode different from the first mode in the operating state. Just do it. Further, the mode in which the visibility changes includes, for example, a mode in which the protruding units 91A to 91G differ depending on whether they overlap or do not overlap with other members provided in front.

The second protruding device 9B is provided between the first protruding device 9A and the game board 12. The second projecting device 9B is arranged so that the projecting member 96, which will be described later, is partially exposed from the lower end of the opening 130a in the standby state (non-operating state). It is configured to move significantly upward toward the center of 130a. As a result, the second projecting device 9B performs a predetermined effect operation so as to cover the effect image displayed in the display area 13a. The second projecting device 9B may move when the projecting member 96 is partially exposed from the lower end of the barrier 130a in the standby state, or when the entire projecting member 96 is not exposed in the standby state. By doing so, the whole may be completely exposed. The exposure here also means that it is not difficult to see, but for example, the protruding member 96 is visually recognized in the first aspect in the standby state, and the protruding member 96 is visually recognized in the second aspect different from the first aspect in the operating state. May be visible. Further, the projecting member 96 may be changed in a mode in which the visibility differs depending on whether the projecting member 96 overlaps or does not overlap with another member provided in front.

[Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 13 is composed of a liquid crystal, and performs various effect displays in the display area 13a.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect image associated with (corresponding to) the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 described later is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of identification symbols (decoration) composed of, for example, numbers 1 to 8 and various characters, etc., are excluded except for specific cases. The symbol) is variablely displayed in the display area 13a.

Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61 has a specific mode (the result of the stop display is a "big hit"), the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 13a.

As an effect for making the player understand that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of decorative symbols stopped and displayed are arranged in a specific mode (for example, the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction). ), And then an effect such as displaying an image notifying the "big hit" can be mentioned.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, an effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol hold display device 64 and the second special symbol hold display device 65, which will be described later, is displayed. For example, in the display area 13a, hold information (for example, the same number of hold symbols as the hold number) for notifying the hold number of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed based on the information of the reserved ball of the special symbol, and the advance notice at this time is also displayed in the display area 13a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display device 62 described later is in a predetermined mode, the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 displays an effect image that causes the player to grasp the information. It may be further provided with a function to display on.

[Shutter device]
Next, the shutter device 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22.

The shutter device 8 includes a plurality of base members 80A to 80C, a pair of left and right movable units 81A and 81B, and drive units 82A and 82B for driving the movable units 81A and 81B, respectively.

The plurality of base members 80A to 80C are independent of each other, the base member 80A is fixed to the lower left side of the frame member 130, the base member 80B is fixed to the lower right side of the frame member 130, and the base member 80C is fixed. It is fixed to the upper part of the frame member 130. Between the base member 80A and the base member 80B, a space is provided at a predetermined interval in which the projecting member 96 of the second projecting device 9B, which will be described later, can be arranged.

The base member 80A is provided with a guide hole 800A for guiding a part of the left movable unit 81A in the left-right direction, and the base member 80B is provided with a guide hole 800A for moving a part of the right movable unit 81B in the left-right direction. A guide hole 800B is provided for this purpose. The guide hole 800A is formed so that the height becomes lower by a predetermined dimension from the left end portion to the right end portion, and the guide hole 800A is inclined downward from the middle portion to the right end portion. The guide hole 800B has a shape symmetrical to that of the guide hole 800A, and is formed so that the height becomes lower by a predetermined dimension as it progresses from the right end portion to the left end portion, and the guide hole 800B generally descends from the middle portion to the left end portion. It is tilted. Further, each of the base members 80A and 80B is provided with a guide groove 801 for allowing the movable units 81A and 81B to move in the left-right direction while supporting each of the movable units 81A and 81B as a whole.

Drive units 82A and 82B are incorporated in the base member 80C. Further, in the lower left side of the base member 80C, a guide hole 800Ca for moving and guiding a part of the left movable unit 81A in the left-right direction is provided so as to face the guide hole 800A, and is provided in the lower right side of the base member 80C. Is provided so that a guide hole 800Cb for guiding a part of the movable unit 81B on the right side in the left-right direction faces the guide hole 800B. These guide holes 800Ca and 800Cb are formed so as to form a vertically symmetrical shape with the guide holes 800A and 800B. That is, the guide hole 800Ca is formed so that the height becomes higher by a predetermined dimension from the left end portion to the right end portion, and the guide hole 800Ca is generally inclined upward from the middle portion to the right end portion. The guide hole 800Cb is formed so that the height becomes higher by a predetermined dimension from the right end portion to the left end portion, and the guide hole 800Cb is inclined upward from the middle portion to the left end portion. Further, on both the left and right sides of the lower portion of the base member 8C, guide grooves 802 are provided so as to be able to move in the left-right direction while supporting each of the movable units 81A and 81B as a whole.

The pair of left and right movable units 81A and 81B are provided so as to form symmetrical forms with each other. The movable unit 81A on the left side has a slide member 810 that can move only in the left-right direction, an arch member 811 that is arranged on the upper side while being supported by the front surface of the slide member 810 and can rotate a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction, and a slide. An arch member 812 that is arranged under the arch member 811 while being supported by the front surface of the member 810 and can rotate a predetermined angle in a counterclockwise direction, and an arch member 811 that is rotatably supported by the rear surface of the slide member 810. The first link members 813 and 814 connected to each of the 812 and the second link members 815 and 816 connected to the first link members 813 and 814 while being vertically movable on the rear surface of the slide member 810. It is composed of and. The movable unit 81B on the right side has the same constituent members as the movable unit 81A on the left side, except that the movable unit 81B on the left side has a symmetrical shape and operates in the opposite direction to the movable unit 81A on the left side. These similar components are designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and will be described below as relating to the left movable unit 81A unless otherwise specified.

The front surface of the slide member 810 is decorated, and both upper and lower ends are supported so as to be movable in the left-right direction along the guide grooves 801 and 802.

As shown in FIG. 21, the upper arch member 811 includes a substrate base member 8110, an illuminated substrate 8111, a lens cover 8112, and a decorative cover 8113. The lower arch member 812 is paired with the upper arch member 811 and has the same constituent members as the upper arch member 811 except that the arch member 811 has a vertically symmetrical shape and operates in the opposite direction. Consists of having. The components of the lower arch member 812 are designated by the same reference numerals as the components of the upper arch member 811, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The substrate base member 8110 is rotatably supported at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the slide member 810. The illuminated substrate 8111 has an LED 59D that can be lit or blinked in conjunction with the movement of the entire shutter device 8, and is fixed to the front surface of the substrate base member 8110. The surface of the illuminated substrate 8111 is formed so as to function as a reflective surface by applying a reflective material having excellent reflection efficiency or surface processing. The lens cover 8112 has a plurality of translucent portions 8112a that guide the light from the LED 59D behind it to the outside, and is integrally attached to the decorative cover 8113. The translucent portion 8112a of the lens cover 8112 is formed so as to form a projecting convex portion toward the front side, and at least the translucent portion 8112a is translucent so as to guide light outward. Has. As a result, the translucent portion 8112a functions as a translucent surface. The decorative cover 8113 is decorated on the front surface, has a plurality of openings 8113a that expose the translucent portion 8112a of the lens cover 8112 to the outside, and is integrated with the lens cover 8112 to cover the illuminated substrate 8111. Is attached to the substrate base member 8110. At least the back surface of the decorative cover 8113 is formed so as to function as a reflective surface by, for example, applying a reflective material having excellent diffused reflection or surface processing. The entire lens cover 8112 may be transparent, and only a part of the lens cover 8112 may be exposed to the opening 8113a of the decorative cover 8113. Further, the decorative cover 8113 does not have to have an excellent light reflectivity on the back surface as long as it has at least a light-shielding property.

As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 22, the plurality of LEDs 59D on the illuminated substrate 8111 are arranged at positions not facing the translucent portion 8112a of the lens cover 8112 and the opening 8113a of the decorative cover 8113. That is, most of the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 59D is diffusely reflected on the back surface of the decorative cover 8113 and proceeds to the surface of the illuminated substrate 8111, further reflected on the surface of the illuminated substrate 8111, and then passes through the translucent portion 8112a. And emits to the outside. As a result, since the LED 59D having relatively high brightness is located at a position facing the back surface of the decorative cover 8113, its visibility can be reduced without being directly visible from the outside through the translucent portion 8112a. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emitting spots due to the LED 59D inconspicuous. As a result, it is possible to improve not only the dynamic effect of the shutter device 8 but also the visual effect of the light effect of the LED 59D. In addition, "emission" includes meanings such as light output and straight travel. Further, the "light emitting spot" means that a light source such as an LED is used as a light emitting portion, and the vicinity of the light emitting portion is passed through a translucent member (lens member, light diffusing sheet, translucent sheet, etc.) provided so as to cover the light source. When visually recognized, it means that the brightness in the vicinity of the light emitting portion becomes relatively high and the shading becomes conspicuous. For example, when the light emitting part has a circular shape, the brightness of the central part tends to be the highest, and although it depends on the degree of light diffusion, if the directivity of the light emitted from a light source such as an LED is strong, light emission spots occur. Cheap. The light emitting part that is visually recognized as a high-intensity point or spot differs in brightness, hue, visibility, etc. from the surrounding low-intensity part (difference occurs, is emphasized, etc.), so as much as possible. It is necessary to prevent the formation of light emitting spots by emitting light uniformly. As a result, in the present embodiment, measures are taken to make the light emitting portion difficult to see, reduce the visibility, or make the light emitting portion inconspicuous.

Both the upper arch member 811 and the lower arch member 812 are rotatable around a fulcrum S set at the center of the slide member 810. That is, the arch member 812 is rotatably supported below the arch member 811 by the central portion of the front surface of the slide member 810, and is configured to be interlocked with the operation of the arch member 811. Such an arch member 812 also emits light by a plurality of LEDs 59D arranged inside. As a result, the lower arch member 812 emits light while interlocking with the upper arch member 811 to improve the effect.

The first link member 813 is composed of a member bent in a substantially L shape, and has an intermediate portion 8130 rotatably supported on the back surface of a slide member 810 that is in the vicinity of the upper arch member 811. A pin 811A provided at an appropriate portion on the back surface of the arch member 811 at a predetermined distance from the fulcrum S is loosely fitted to the lower end of the first link member 813. The pin 811A is inserted into the elongated hole 810A provided in the slide member 810. The upper end of the first link member 813 is arranged so as to be substantially closer to the center side of the opening 130 than the intermediate portion 8130, and a pin 815A provided at the lower end of the second link member 815 can rotate at the upper end. Is connected to.

The second link member 815 is composed of a strip-shaped member, and is held on the back surface of the slide member 810 so as to be vertically movable in a substantially vertical direction. The lower end of the second link member 815 is connected to the upper end of the first link member 813 via the pin 815A. A pin 815B is provided at the upper end of the second link member 815, and the pin 815B is loosely fitted into the guide hole 800Ca of the base member 80C.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the left slide member 810 is located on the left side of the standby position, the upper end of the second link member 815 is along the lower left end of the guide hole 800Ca. The lower end of the first link member 813 is in a state where the pin 811A is moved to the leftmost side accordingly. As a result, the arch member 811 integrated with the pin 811A is located outside the left end of the opening 130 together with the slide member 810, and is hidden in a substantially upright posture without overlapping with the display area 13a.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the slide member 810 on the left side moves to the right and the slide member 810 is located closer to the center of the opening 130, the upper end of the second link member 815 is reached. Is in a state along the right end portion which is the higher position of the guide hole 800Ca, and the lower end of the first link member 813 is in a state where the pin 811A is moved to the right side accordingly. As a result, the arch member 811 integrated with the pin 811A is located near the center of the opening 130 together with the slide member 810, but is in a posture that is largely tilted from the generally standing posture and overlaps with a part of the display area 13a. It will be in the state of appearing.

The lower first link member 814 and the second link member 816 are also the same as the upper first link member 813 and the second link member 815 except that the operation is vertically symmetrical, and are configured as follows. There is.

The first link member 814 is composed of a member bent in a substantially L shape, and has an intermediate portion 8140 rotatably supported on the back surface of the slide member 810 which is in the vicinity of the lower arch member 812. A pin 812A provided at an appropriate portion on the back surface of the arch member 812, which is a predetermined distance from the fulcrum S, is loosely fitted to the upper end of the first link member 814. The pin 812A is inserted into a long hole (not shown) provided in the slide member 810. The portion near the arch member 812 provided with the pin 812A is urged by one end (not shown) of the coil spring 817 so as to be elastically easy to move toward the center of the opening 130 (FIG. 18). See the enlarged circle part). The lower end of the first link member 814 is arranged so as to be substantially closer to the center side of the opening 130 than the intermediate portion 8140, and a pin 816A provided at the upper end of the second link member 816 is rotatable at the lower end. Is connected to.

The second link member 816 is composed of a strip-shaped member, and is held on the back surface of the slide member 810 so as to be vertically movable in a substantially vertical direction. The upper end of the second link member 816 is connected to the lower end of the first link member 814 via the pin 816A. A pin 816B is provided at the lower end of the second link member 816, and the pin 816B is loosely fitted into the guide hole 800A of the base member 80A.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, in the state where the left slide member 810 is located on the left side, which is the standby position, the lower end of the second link member 816 is in a state along the left end portion which is the higher position of the guide hole 800A. The upper end of the first link member 814 is in a state where the pin 812A is moved to the leftmost side accordingly. As a result, the arch member 812 integrated with the pin 812A is located outside the left end of the opening 130 together with the slide member 810, and is hidden in a substantially upright posture without overlapping with the display area 13a.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the slide member 810 on the left side moves to the right and the slide member 810 is positioned closer to the center of the opening 130, the lower end of the second link member 816 Is in a state along the lower right end portion of the guide hole 800A, and accordingly, the upper end of the first link member 814 is in a state in which the pin 812A is moved to the right side. As a result, the arch member 812 integrated with the pin 812A is located near the center of the opening 130 together with the slide member 810, but is in a posture that is largely tilted from the generally standing posture and overlaps with a part of the display area 13a. It will be in the state of appearing. At this time, the arch member 812 rotates upward against the force of gravity, but is smoothly rotated by the urging force of the coil spring 817.

As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, since the movable unit 81B on the right side is also configured in the same manner as the movable unit 81A on the left side, it operates symmetrically with the movable unit 81A on the left side. That is, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the slide member 810 of the movable unit 81B on the right side is located on the right side as the standby position, the arch members 811 and 812 of the movable unit 81B are opened together with the slide member 810. It is located outside the right end of the unit 130, and is hidden in a substantially upright posture without overlapping the display area 13a.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the slide member 810 of the movable unit 81B on the right side moves to the left and the slide member 810 is located closer to the center of the opening 130, the movable unit 81B Although the arch members 811 and 812 are located closer to the center of the opening 130 together with the slide member 810, they are in a posture in which they are largely tilted from a generally standing posture, and appear while overlapping a part of the display area 13a. At this time, the tips of the arch members 811 and 812 on the right side abut on or rotate to a position where they almost touch the tips of the arch members 811 and 812 on the left side. That is, in front of the display area 13a, the arch members 811 and 812 on both the left and right sides rotate while moving toward the center to form a shape in which they are united with each other.

The drive unit 82A is arranged on the left side of the base member 80C to drive the left movable unit 81A, and the drive unit 82B is arranged on the right side of the base member 80C to drive the right movable unit 81B. There is. The drive units 82A and 82B include a rack gear 820 fixed to the upper end of the slide member 810, a pinion gear 821 that meshes with the rack gear 820, and a plurality of drive units 82A and 82B for reducing the rotational speed while transmitting a driving force by engaging with the pinion gear 821. The reduction gear 822 and the production drive motors 60A and 60B that mesh with one reduction gear 822 to generate a driving force are provided. Further, the base member 80C is provided with effect sensors 210A and 210B capable of optically detecting a part of the rack gear 820.

For example, focusing on the left drive unit 82A, the effect drive motor 60A operates in a predetermined rotational direction in the state shown in FIG. 17, and the left pinion gear 821 moves in the counterclockwise direction via the plurality of reduction gears 822. When rotated to, the rack gear 820 on the left side is moved to the right. As a result, the left slide member 810 is moved to the right together with the left arch members 811 and 812, and is finally moved to the position shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the pinion gear 821 rotates in the clockwise direction in the state shown in FIG. 19, the rack gear 820 on the left side is moved to the left, and the slide member 810 on the left side is again together with the arch members 811 and 812 on the left side. It is moved to the standby position shown in FIG. At this time, a part of the rack gear 820 on the left side is detected by the effect sensor 210A, so that it is possible to recognize that the slide member 810 on the left side has reached the standby position.

On the other hand, focusing on the drive unit 82B on the right side, the drive unit 82B on the right side also operates and interlocks in the same manner as the drive unit 82A on the left side. That is, when the left drive unit 82A operates in the state shown in FIG. 17, the right effect drive motor 60B operates in a predetermined rotational direction, and the right pinion gear 821 rotates clockwise via the plurality of reduction gears 822. By rotating in the direction of, the rack gear 820 on the right side is moved to the right. As a result, the slide member 810 on the right side is moved to the left together with the arch members 811 and 812 on the right side, and is finally moved to the position shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the pinion gear 821 on the right side rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the state shown in FIG. 19, the rack gear 820 on the right side is moved to the right side, and the slide member 810 on the right side is the arch member 811 on the right side. Together with 812, it is moved to the standby position shown in FIG. 17 again. At this time, a part of the rack gear 820 on the right side is detected by the effect sensor 210B, so that it is possible to recognize that the slide member 810 on the right side has reached the standby position.

According to such a pair of left and right movable units 81A and 81B, when the slide member 810 moves in the left-right direction, the second link members 815 and 816 move in the left-right direction along the guide holes 800A, 800A, 800Ca and 800Cb. While moving, it is displaced in the vertical direction, and the first link members 813 and 814 rotate around the intermediate portions 8130 and 8140 accordingly. As a result, the arch members 811 and 812 rotate around the fulcrum S via the first link members 813 and 814 while moving in the left-right direction together with the slide member 810. That is, since the arch members 811 and 812 move in the direction of rotation while moving in the left-right direction at the same time, it is possible to form a shape that is united by complicated movements along a plurality of directions, and the shutter device 8 can be used as the shutter device 8. The dynamic effect is enhanced.

[Protrusion device]
Next, the projecting device 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. As described above, the projecting device 9 includes a first projecting device 9A and a second projecting device 9B.

<First protrusion device>
The first projecting device 9A assists the operation of the base member 90, the plurality of projecting units 91A to 91G, the pair of left and right link mechanisms 92A and 92B for operating the projecting units 91A to 91G, and the projecting unit 91D. The operation assisting mechanism 93 and the effect drive motors 60C and 60D for driving the link mechanisms 92A and 92B, respectively, are included.

The base member 90 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially C-shape in front view, and an opening is arranged below. The base members 80A and 80B of the shutter device 8 and the second projecting device 9B are arranged at positions corresponding to the openings. The base member 90 is fixed to the back surface of the frame member 130 with a space between the base member 90 and the frame member 130 so that the shutter device 8 and the like can be arranged. The base member 90 supports the plurality of projecting units 91A to 91G around the opening 130a, and moves and guides the projecting units 91A to 91G in the direction from the outside to the inside of the opening 130a and vice versa. Guide hole 900 is provided. The first joint portion J1 of the link mechanisms 92A and 92B, which will be described later, is movably connected to the guide hole 900, and the projecting units 91A to 91G indirectly connect to the guide hole 900 via the first joint portion J1. Is supported by.

Each of the plurality of projecting units 91A to 91G is basically composed of the same members, and includes a base member 910 and a decorative cover member 911 that covers the base member 910. The cover member 911 is not shown in the drawings after FIG. 25.

The base member 910 is provided so as to be integral with the cover member 911 and to be variable in and out around the opening 130a. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the base member 910 is arranged inside the elongated hole 910A at a position corresponding to the guide hole 900 and having a shape along the same direction as the guide hole 900 and around the opening 130a. It has a tip portion 910B. The first joint portion J1 of the link mechanisms 92A and 92B, which will be described later, is movably connected to the elongated hole 910A. The second joint portion J2 of the link mechanisms 92A and 92B, which will be described later, is rotatably connected to the tip portion 910B.

The pair of left and right link mechanisms 92A and 92B apply the driving force of the directing drive motors 60C and 60D arranged on the left and right sides of the base member 90 to the left protruding units 91A to 91C, the right protruding units 91E to 91G, and the most. This is for efficiently transmitting the signal to the upper protruding unit 91D. The left link mechanism 92A is mainly provided to transmit the driving force to the left protruding units 91A to 91C and the uppermost protruding unit 91D, and the right link mechanism 92B is mainly provided to the right protruding units 91E to 91G and the uppermost portion. It is provided so as to transmit a driving force to the protruding unit 91D of the above. That is, both the link mechanisms 92A and 92B are connected to the projecting unit 91D and are arranged in a substantially C-shape in front view as a whole. The link mechanisms 92A and 92B on both the left and right sides have the same constituent members except that they have a symmetrical structure and operate in opposite directions. These similar components are designated by the same reference numerals in the drawings, and in the following description, those related to the link mechanism 92A on the left side will be described unless otherwise specified.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the link mechanism 92A has a drive gear 920 that rotates according to the operation of the effect drive motor 60C and a swing gear 921 that swings in a predetermined direction by meshing with the drive gear 920. The swing arm 922 and the swing arm 922 whose base end is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 90 by being guidedly connected to the elongated hole at the tip of the swing gear 921. The connecting member 923 pivotally supported in the elongated hole via a pin and the outer and inner tip portions with respect to the opening 130a are rotatably connected to each other as the first joint portion J1 and the second joint portion J2, and are intermediate. It is configured to have a plurality of arm members 924A to 924F which are connected to each other so that the crossing angle can be changed, with the portion as the third joint portion J3. The base member 90 is provided with effect sensors 210C and 210D that can optically detect a part of the swing arms 922 on both the left and right sides, respectively. By detecting a part of the swing arm 922 by these effect sensors 210C and 210D, it is recognized that the projecting units 91A to 91G are in the standby state together with the link mechanisms 92A and 92B.

The connecting member 923 is movably engaged with the elongated hole 910A of the base member 910. The first joint portion J1 is rotatably connected to the connecting member 923, and the first joint portion J1 on the connecting member 923 is connected to the connecting member 923 with the outer tip of the arm member 924A and the arm. The outer tip of the member 924C is rotatably connected. The other first joint portion J1 is movably engaged with the elongated hole 910A of the base member 910, and the other first joint portion J1 is engaged with the outer tips of the other arm members 924B, 924D, 924E, and 924F. The portions are rotatably connected. The second joint portion J2 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the base member 910, and the inner tip portions of the arm members 924A to 924F are rotatably connected to the second joint portion J2.

Next, the operation of the link mechanism 92A will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in the state where the swing arm 922 is shown by a solid line, the drive gear 920 rotates in the clockwise direction in response to the operation of the effect drive motor 60C, and the swing gear 921 counterclockwise accordingly. When rotated by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction, the protruding portion of the swing gear 921 swings the tip end portion of the swing arm 922 inward of the opening 130a while following the elongated hole of the swing arm 922. As a result, the connecting member 923 connected to the elongated hole of the swing arm 922 via the pin slides inward of the opening 130a by a predetermined distance.

At this time, the first joint portion J1 also slides inward of the opening 130a by a predetermined distance according to the connecting member 923. Then, the two arm members 924A and 924C whose outer tip is connected to the first joint J1 tend to move inward of the opening 130a as a whole. On the other hand, the two arm members 924A and 924C are separated from each other as the second joint portion J2, which is the inner tip portion thereof, moves inward. The intersection angle with the other connected arm members 924B and 924D is widened.

That is, focusing on the first joint portion J1 and the second joint portion J2 corresponding to the protruding units 91A to 91D, respectively, the first joint portion J1 is relatively outwardly displaced along the elongated hole 910A of the base member 910. At the same time, the second joint portion J2 is integrated with the base member 910 and is displaced inward of the opening 130a, so that the distance between the first joint portion J1 and the second joint portion J2 becomes large. As a result, as shown by a virtual line in FIG. 26, the link mechanism 92A is in a deformed posture that pushes the protruding units 91A to 91D inward of the opening 130a, and the protruding units 91A to 91D are around the opening 130a. In the state of waiting, the state of appearance appears in front of the display area 13a.

When returning from the state in which the protruding units 91A to 91D have appeared to the standby state, the link mechanism 92A is operated in the opposite direction to the above-described operation. Further, the link mechanism 92B on the right side is operated at the same time as the link mechanism 92A on the left side. As a result, all the protruding units 91A to 91G are in a state of appearing at the same time or in a standby state.

Here, in particular, the uppermost protruding unit 91D moves downward from the standby position to the appearance position by the cooperation of the link mechanisms 92A and 92B on both the left and right sides, while moves upward when returning from the appearance position to the standby position. Will be done. On the other hand, the uppermost protruding unit 91D is located farthest from the production drive motors 60C and 60D, which are the drive sources, and the left and right arm members 924E and 924F may be simultaneously deformed and interlocked. It is also conceivable that the protruding unit 91D does not operate smoothly. Therefore, the operation assisting mechanism 93 described below is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, the operation assisting mechanism 93 is incorporated in the vicinity of the protrusion unit 91D arranged on the back surface of the base member 90, and has a substantially U-shaped swing member 930 and a swing member. It is configured to have a torsion spring 931 that applies an urging force to the 930 and a protruding pin 932 fixed to the back surface of the base member 910. Regarding the operation assist mechanism 93, FIG. 29 shows a standby state, FIG. 30 shows a state during operation, and FIG. 31 shows a state at the time of appearance. A space is formed in the base member 90 so that the swing member 930 can swing while the protruding pin 932 can be brought into contact with the swing member 930.

In the swing member 930, a bent intermediate portion 930A is rotatably supported on the back surface of the base member 90. In the swing member 930, the tip portion 931A of the torsion spring 931 is rotatably wound around the tip portion 930B located on the upper side in the standby state of FIG. 29. The rocking member 930 is formed with a recess 930C into which the protruding pin 932 can be inserted and removed. The main body of the torsion spring 931 is composed of a coil spring, and the smaller the distance between the tip portion 931A and the base end portion 931B, the greater the urging force in the direction in which they are separated from each other. The base end portion 931B of the torsion spring 931 is rotatably wound around the support portion 931C on the back surface of the base member 90. Such a torsion spring 931 is in a posture in which almost no urging force is generated or even if it is generated, only a relatively small urging force can be generated in the standby state of FIG. 29 and the state at the time of appearance of FIG. 31. On the other hand, in the state during the operation of FIG. 30, the torsion spring 931 is in a position capable of applying a relatively large urging force. The protruding pin 932 is in a state of being in contact with the recess 930C of the swing member 930 in the standby state of FIG. 29 or the state of operation of FIG. 30. On the other hand, in the state at the time of appearance of FIG. 31, the protruding pin 932 is in a state of being completely out of the recess 930C of the swing member 930.

Next, the operation of the operation assisting mechanism 93 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 (A) to 32 (D). First, as shown in FIG. 32 (A), in the standby state, the swing member 930 is in a state in which the tip portion 930B is located at the highest position, and the protruding pin 932 is relatively together with the base member 910 (not shown). It is located above and is in a state of being in the recess 930C of the swing member 930.

At this time, the torsion spring 931 applies a force (urging force) elastically urging the tip portion 930B of the swing member 930 from the tip portion 931A, and this urging force is applied to the swing member 930. It does not act in the direction of rotating at least downward with respect to the turning radius d connecting the intermediate portion 930A and the tip portion 930B. As a result, although the urging force of the torsion spring 931 acts relatively weakly on the swing member 930, the tip portion 930B is maintained in the highest position unless the protruding pin 932 moves downward together with the base member 910. NS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), when the projecting pin 932 starts to move downward together with the base member 910, the tip of the swing member 930 is pushed downward by the projecting pin 932 to push the inner wall of the recess 930C downward. The portion 930B swings downward.

At this time, since the tip portion 930B of the swing member 930 approaches the support portion 931C, the distance between the tip portion 931A and the base end portion 931B of the torsion spring 931 gradually decreases, and the distance between the tip portion 931A and the tip portion 931A gradually decreases. The urging force of the swing member 930 with respect to the tip portion 930B is increased. On the other hand, even the urging force that increases in this way does not act in the direction of rotating the swing member 930 downward until the direction of its action is substantially parallel to the radius of gyration d. As a result, although the urging force of the torsion spring 931 gradually acts strongly on the swing member 930, the downward force does not act on the protruding pin 932 until the posture is tilted to some extent.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), when the projecting pin 932 moves downward together with the base member 910, the swing member 930 has a tip portion due to the inner wall of the recess 930C being pushed further downward by the projecting pin 932. The 930B swings further downward.

Also at this time, since the tip portion 930B of the swing member 930 is relatively close to the support portion 931C, the distance between the tip portion 931A and the base end portion 931B of the torsion spring 931 is relatively small. It has become. As a result, a sufficient urging force acts on the tip portion 930B of the swing member 930 from the tip portion 931A of the torsion spring 931. Then, this urging force acts in a direction in which the acting direction rotates downward with respect to the radius of gyration d. As a result, the swing member 930 swings downward according to the protruding pin 932 up to the intermediate position shown in FIG. 32 (B), but when it swings to the position shown in FIG. 32 (C), the above is different. On the contrary, a force for pushing downward is applied to the protruding pin 932 that abuts on the inner wall of the recess 930C. As a result, the protruding unit 91D is smoothly lowered and moved not only by the force moved by the arm members 924E and 924F on both the left and right sides, but also by the force acting by the motion assisting mechanism 93 using the swing member 930 and the torsion spring 931. Be done.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 32 (D), when the protruding pin 932 moves to the lowest position together with the base member 910, the protruding pin 932 is in a state of being out of the recess 930C, and the swing member 930 is at the tip. The portion 930B is located at the lowest position. At this time, the torsion spring 931 is in a natural posture in which almost no urging force is generated. As a result, the distance from the tip portion 930B to the support portion 931C of the swing member 930 becomes about the same as the separation distance between the tip portion 931A and the base end portion 931B when the torsion spring 931 takes a natural posture, and the separation distance is about the same. It is regulated not to expand further. As a result, the swinging member 930 is maintained in a posture in which the recess 930C is substantially downward, and the protruding unit 91D is maintained in a state of being lowered to the lowest position.

When the protruding units 91A to 91D descend from the lowest position and appear, then rise to the highest position, which is the standby position, and return to the standby state, the procedure is the reverse of the operation described above. According to this, the operation assisting mechanism 93 operates. As a result, the projecting unit 91D can be smoothly operated not only during the downward movement but also during the upward movement through the acting force of the operation assisting mechanism 93 using the swing member 930 and the torsion spring 931. Further, the urging force of the torsion spring 931 may not be 0 in the state of FIG. 32 (D), but may be a state in which a urging force smaller than that of the state of FIG. 32 (A) acts. Specifically, the magnitude of the urging force of the torsion spring 931 is expressed as (D) <(C) ≤ (A) ≤ (B) using the reference numerals in FIGS. 32 (A) to 32 (D). It may be changed so as to be. Further, it is not limited to the magnitude change of the urging force as described above, and in the state of FIG. 32 (D), the torsion spring with respect to the tip portion 930B which is displaced downward by swinging relatively large. The urging force of 931 may act as a force to keep the position shown in the figure (D). That is, when the swing member 930 is rotated in a predetermined direction and is rotated to a predetermined position below the predetermined position, if the swing member 930 exceeds the predetermined position, the urging force of the torsion spring 931 acts in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. You may.

According to such an operation assist mechanism 93, the torsion spring 931 changes its posture with its base end portion 931B as a fulcrum while the protruding unit 91D is moving downward from the highest position to the lowest position, so that the tip of the torsion spring 931 is tipped. It is possible to switch and apply an upward to downward urging force to the swing member 930 from the portion 931A. The swing member 930 swings by interlocking with the protrusion unit 91D via the protrusion pin 932, and can transmit the urging force from the torsion spring 931 to the protrusion pin 932.

That is, when the protruding unit 91D moves downward from the middle, a downward urging force is applied by the swing member 930, and when the protruding unit 91D moves upward from the lowest position to the highest position, the protruding unit 91D moves upward from the middle. Since it is added by switching to the urging force, it is possible to realize a smooth movement in the vertical direction without using a separate weight as in the conventional case. As a result, a plurality of projecting units 91A to 91G including the projecting unit 91D can be made to appear at the same time without any trouble, and the dynamic effect of the first projecting device 9A can be enhanced.

<Second protrusion device>
The second projecting device 9B will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 23 and the like. The second projecting device 9B includes a base member 95, a projecting member 96, a swing arm 97 for operating the projecting member 96 in the vertical direction, and a directing drive motor 60E for driving the swing arm 97. It is composed of. Although not shown in FIG. 23, an effect sensor 210E capable of optically detecting a part of the member driving the swing arm 97 is arranged (see FIG. 33).

The base member 95 is arranged below the opening 130a. The projecting member 96 is supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction along a guide groove provided in the base member 95. By locating the protruding member 96 below the opening 130a in the standby state, the protruding member 96 is hidden so as not to substantially overlap with the display area 13a. At this time, it is recognized that the protruding member 96 is in the standby state by detecting a part of the member driving the swing arm 97 by the effect sensor 210E. On the other hand, when the effect drive motor 60E operates in a predetermined rotation direction, the swing arm 97 swings upward. As a result, the protruding member 96 rises to the center of the opening 130a and appears in front of the display area 13a. When returning from the state in which the projecting member 96 appears to the state in which the projecting member 96 appears, the swing arm 97 is operated in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned operation. Further, the projecting member 96 is provided with a translucent cover, and an illuminated substrate on which the LED 59E (see FIG. 33) is mounted is provided inside.

Such a protruding member 96 of the second protruding device 9B may appear at the same time as the movable units 81A and 81B of the shutter device 8 and the protruding units 91A to 91G of the first protruding device 9A, or may appear independently. The dynamic effect can be enhanced by such a second protrusion device 9B.

[Special symbol display device]
The special symbol display device 61 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the special symbol in the special symbol game. In the present embodiment, the special symbol display device 61 is configured by a 7-segment display that displays a special symbol as a symbol composed of numbers, symbols, or the like.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display device 61 may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The special symbol display device 61 displays the special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 (special symbol start prize). Then, the special symbol display device 61 displays the special symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then displays the stop of the special symbol.

In the following, when the game ball wins the first starting port 44, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is referred to as the first special symbol. Further, a special symbol that is variablely displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the second starting port 45 is referred to as a second special symbol.

In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (a mode of "big hit"), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. It shifts to the jackpot game state which is the state.

That is, in the special symbol display device 61, it is "big hit" that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the big hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the first big winning opening 53 or the second big winning opening 54 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 44 and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the special symbol display device 61, the first big winning opening 53 is in the open state.

On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 45 and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61 in a specific mode, the second large winning opening 54 is opened.

The open state of each large winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Then, when the elapsed period of the open state of each large winning opening satisfies any of these conditions, the large winning opening that was in the open state is closed.

In the following, a game in which the first prize opening 53 or the second prize opening 54 is in a state (open state) in which it is easy to accept a game ball is referred to as a round game. During the round game, the big prize opening will be closed.

In addition, the round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

In the special symbol display device 61, when the stop-displayed special symbol is in a mode other than a specific mode (a mode of "loss"), the gaming state does not shift unless the fall lottery is won.

That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol display device 61, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 44 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable first special symbol corresponding to the winning is changed. The display (holding ball) is put on hold.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the pending display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called "holding number (number of holding balls)") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 45 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning is made. Is put on hold.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the pending display of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays (number of hold) of the second special symbol to be held is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of pending special symbols for variable display is eight in total.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is preferentially executed over the variable display of the other special symbol. .. Specifically, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the reserved ball of the first special symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the reserved order.

[Normal symbol display device]
The ordinary symbol display device 62 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. Then, in the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol display device 62 is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the normal symbol in the normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs (ordinary symbol display LEDs). .. Then, in the normal symbol display device 62, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of each normal symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

The normal symbol display device 62 alternately turns on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs a variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a stop display of the normal symbol.

In the normal symbol display device 62, when the stopped-displayed normal symbol is in a predetermined mode (“hit” mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of "loss"), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the ordinary symbol display device 62, then the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved normal symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of ordinary symbols to be held (that is, "the number of holdings") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[Ordinary symbol hold display device]
The normal symbol hold display device 63 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of holds for variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hold display device 63 includes a plurality of normal symbol hold display LEDs, and the normal symbol hold display device 63 includes the normal symbol hold display device 63. , Each normal symbol hold display LED is turned on / off to display the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Specifically, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays the normal symbol hold display LED according to the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hold display LED corresponds to the hold number of the variable display of the normal symbol. Up to 4 lights are turned on.

[1st special symbol hold display device]
The first special symbol holding display device 64 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The first special symbol hold display device 64 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol (holding ball of the first special symbol) that is being held. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold display device 64 includes a plurality of first special symbol hold display LEDs.

Specifically, the first special symbol hold display device 64 displays the first special symbol hold display LED according to the number of holds for the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold display LED is the first special. A maximum of four lights are lit according to the number of pending symbols in the variable display.

[2nd special symbol hold display device]
The second special symbol hold display device 65 is arranged at the lower right of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The second special symbol hold display device 65 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol (holding ball of the second special symbol) that is being held, and the second special symbol hold display device 65 is a plurality of devices. The second special symbol hold display LED of the above is provided.

Specifically, the second special symbol hold display device 65 displays the second special symbol hold display LED according to the number of holds for the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold display LED is the second. A maximum of 4 lights are lit according to the number of holdings of the variable display of the special symbol.

[Circuit configuration of pachinko machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the configurations of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 70 that mainly controls game movements, a sub-control circuit 200 that controls production movements according to the progress of the game, and mainly game balls. It has a payout / launch control circuit 300 that controls payout and launch.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 71, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory: also referred to as “RWM” for short) 73. Further, the main control circuit 70 includes a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, and a serial communication IC (Integrated Circuit) 76. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery process is performed at the time of winning the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, and this process is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as a means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

A main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, a serial communication IC 76, and the like are connected to the main CPU 71. The main ROM 72 stores various programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables, and the like.

The main CPU 71 executes various processes according to the program stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 functions as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and the values of various flags and variables required for the main CPU 71 for the various processes are stored.

In the present embodiment, the main RAM 73 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 71, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium may be used as the temporary storage area. ..

The reset clock pulse generation circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute the system timer interrupt process described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication IC 76 supplies a command to the sub-control circuit 200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, various devices that operate in response to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

Specifically, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are connected to the main control circuit 70. Will be done.

Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 controls the operation of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game based on the output signal. conduct.

Further, the main control circuit 70 is connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, the first special winning opening solenoid 53b, and the second special winning opening solenoid 54b. Then, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a to bring the pair of blade members of the ordinary electric accessory 46 into an open state or a closed state.

Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the first special winning opening solenoid 53b and the second special winning opening solenoid 54b, respectively, to open or close the first special winning opening 53 and the second special winning opening 54. do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various sensors and receives output signals of the various sensors. Specifically, the main control circuit 70 includes count sensors 53c, 54c, general winning ball sensors 51a, 52a, passing ball sensor 43a, first starting port winning ball sensor 44a, and second starting port winning ball sensor 45a. The area sensor 380A, the non-specific area sensor 380B, the backup clear switch 121, and the like are connected.

The count sensor 53c counts the game balls that have won in the first large winning opening 53, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count sensor 54c counts the game balls that have won in the second large winning opening 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70.

The general winning ball sensor 51a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 51. The general winning ball sensor 52a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 52.

Further, the passing ball sensor 43a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the ball passing detector 43.

The first starting port winning ball sensor 44a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the first starting port 44. The second starting port winning ball sensor 45a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the second starting port 45.

The specific area sensor 380A outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A. The non-specific area sensor 380B outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B.

The backup clear switch 121 outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 and the payout / launch control circuit 300 when the backup data is cleared according to the operation of the manager of the game store or the like at the time of power failure or the like. ..

A payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 70. Here, the main control circuit 70 determines the number of prize balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The predetermined payout condition is that the game ball has won a prize in the various starting openings and various winning openings described above.

Further, the main control circuit 70 transmits information including the number of prize balls determined as described above to the payout / launch control circuit 300 as a prize ball control command.

[Payout / launch control circuit]
The payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a microprocessor such as a CPU, ROM, and RAM. A payout device 170 is connected to the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the microcomputer of the payout / launch control circuit 300 controls, for example, the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 170.

Further, a launching device 15, an external terminal board 140, and a card unit 150 for launching a game ball are connected to the payout / launch control circuit 300. A data display 141 is connected to the external terminal board 140, and a rental operation unit 151 is connected to the card unit 150.

Here, the card unit 150 determines the number of rented balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out on the condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The predetermined payout condition is that the above-mentioned rental operation unit 151 has been operated.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 supplies electric power to the solenoid actuator of the launch device 15 according to the rotation angle when the launch handle 25 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. .. As a result, the launching device 15 controls to launch the game ball.

The external terminal board 140 is used to transmit data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). The data display 141 is installed, for example, on the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as ancillary equipment of the hall, and has a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of hits.

When operated by the player, the rental operation unit 151 outputs a signal requesting the card unit 150 to rent the game ball. When the card unit 150 receives a signal requesting the rental of a game ball from the rental operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits a rental ball control signal including information on the determined number of rental balls to the payout / launch control circuit 300.

Such a payout / launch control circuit 300 receives a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and a rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 150, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 170. do. As a result, the payout device 170 pays out the game ball.

[Sub-control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the serial communication IC 76 of the main control circuit 70. Then, the sub control circuit 200 receives display control in the liquid crystal display device 13, control related to sound generated from the speaker 11, and control of LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h in response to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70. The shutter device 8 and the protrusion device 9 control the effect operation.

That is, the sub-control circuit 200 executes various effects according to the progress of the game based on the command from the main control circuit 70. In the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 200 cannot supply a signal to the main control circuit 70, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-control circuit 200 can transmit a signal to the main control circuit 70. It may have various configurations.

As shown in FIG. 33, the sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, a voice control circuit 206, an LED control circuit 207, and a drive control circuit 208. .. The program ROM 202, the work RAM 203, the display control circuit 205, the voice control circuit 206, the LED control circuit 207, and the drive control circuit 208 are connected to the sub CPU 201.

In the program ROM 202, various programs for controlling the effect operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201 and various data tables are stored. Then, the sub CPU 201 executes various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 72 and the program ROM 202 are applied as storage means for storing programs, various tables, and the like, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a storage medium that can be read by a computer provided with a control means. For example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, or the like. Storage medium may be applied.

Moreover, each of the programs may be recorded in a separate storage medium. Further, the program may be recorded in advance on a recording medium, or may be downloaded from the outside or the like after the power is turned on and recorded in the main RAM 73, the work RAM 203, or the like.

The work RAM 203 functions as a temporary storage area when the sub CPU 201 executes various processes, and the values of various flags and variables required for the sub CPU 201 for the various processes are stored. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium may be used as the temporary storage area.

The display control circuit 205 controls the liquid crystal display device 13 to display an image related to the effect. Although not shown, the display control circuit 205 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP (Video Display Processor)), an image data ROM, a frame buffer, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter, and the like.

The image data ROM stores data for generating various image data. The frame buffer temporarily stores image data. Further, the D / A converter converts image data (digital electric signal) into an image signal (analog electric signal).

The display control circuit 205 performs various processes for displaying an image in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the display control circuit 205 is an image such as a decorative symbol image data, a background image data, and an effect image data indicating a decorative symbol (identification symbol for effect) based on the effect designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201. Temporarily store the data in the frame buffer.

Then, the display control circuit 205 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

The voice control circuit 206 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying a voice signal (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 11. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM based on the effect designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201.

Then, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the read voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the read voice data to the AMP. Further, the AMP amplifies the voice signal and generates the voice from the speaker 11.

The LED control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, an LED data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED lighting patterns are stored, and the like. The drive circuit selects one LED lighting / blinking pattern from a plurality of lighting / blinking patterns stored in the LED data ROM based on the effect designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201. As a result, the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are lit or blinked according to the lighting / blinking pattern.

The drive control circuit 208 drives the effect drive motors 60A to 60E of the shutter device 8 and the protrusion device 9 based on the effect designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201.

Further, the sub-control circuit 200 includes effect sensors 210A to 210E for detecting the operation of the shutter device 8 and the protrusion device 9, an effect button switch 230 for detecting that the effect button 23 has been pressed, and a jog dial. A jog dial switch 240 that detects the rotation direction and the amount of operation when the 24 is rotated is connected. When the detection signals from the effect sensors 210A to 210E are input as ON, the sub CPU 201 recognizes that the shutter device 8 and the protrusion device 9 are in the standby state, and the detection signals from the effect sensors 210A to 210E are turned off. Is input, it is recognized that the shutter device 8 and the protrusion device 9 are in the effect operation state. Further, the sub CPU 201 controls so that a predetermined effect display is performed according to a detection signal (input signal) from the effect button switch 230 or the jog dial switch 240.

Such a sub-control circuit 200 causes the liquid crystal display device 13 to display a predetermined effect image, causes the shutter device 8 and the protrusion device 9 to perform a predetermined effect operation, and generates sound from the speaker 11 accordingly. , LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are turned on or blinked to display the effect.

[Sending messages to various control circuits]
FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a procedure for transmitting effect designation information (message) from the sub CPU 201, which is a host control circuit, to various control circuits 205 to 208.

As shown in FIG. 34, the sub CPU 201 transmits the effect designation information for designating the effect operation to each control circuit 205 to 208 according to the communication format of a message. A message is also called a command and is composed of, for example, 8 bytes. In the message, in order from the highest byte, "device" (1 byte), "system" (1 byte), "spare area" (2 bytes), "category" (2 bytes), "event" (2 bytes) An area for storing control information such as is provided.

The "device" stores control information for designating a device (control circuit) to which a message is sent. The "system" stores control information for executing a special operation such as a system operation of the entire sub-control circuit 200 and a debugging process. The "spare area" is reserved for spare use. In the "category", control information for dividing the production unit is stored. The "event" mainly stores control information for setting the operation pattern of the advance notice effect. The spare area can be set to store various information according to the design of the gaming machine.

The message is transmitted from the sub CPU 201 to the designated device (control circuit) at a predetermined timing via the direct buffer according to the contents of the directory table described below. Each of the control circuits 205 to 208 that received the message controls the operation related to the effect based on the message. In this embodiment, the display operation by the liquid crystal display device 13 is synchronized with other operations by the speakers 11, LEDs 59A to 59E, 59e to 59h, and the effect drive motors 60A to 60E, so that the other operation is performed. Is delayed from the display operation by a predetermined cycle (in the present embodiment, for example, one cycle corresponding to one frame (1 / 30s)) because the corresponding control circuits 206 to 208 receive the message and temporarily store the message. Will be executed. The direct buffer is an area for temporarily storing a message until it is transmitted, and is secured in, for example, a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. In the present embodiment, the voice control circuit 206 and the LED control circuit 207 are separated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the voice / LED control circuit may be configured by one control circuit. Further, other operations are executed with a delay of one cycle corresponding to one frame, but the present invention is not limited to this, and several frames or several cycles are executed depending on the messages stacked in each control circuit 206 to 208. It may be late. Further, the transmission timing to the control circuits 206 to 208 may be controlled by the sub CPU 201 serving as the host control circuit, and the control circuits 206 to 208 may execute each control immediately after the reception. In any case, the execution cycle may or may not be delayed.

The direct table is a table that defines information for generating an operation related to the effect at a predetermined timing. Here, "to generate an operation related to the effect" is synonymous with transmitting a message. There are three types of direct tables: master table, slave table, and single table.

The master table is a table in which a plurality of master tables are not registered at the same time, and is mainly used when a decorative pattern is changed. The slave table is a table that can be registered only when the master table is registered, that is, a table that is subordinate to the master table, and is mainly used for advance notice production and the like. Multiple slave tables can be registered at the same time. Further, as the slave table, the same type can be registered even in different master tables. When registering the slave table, an ID number is required, and an ID number that has become an empty number may be automatically assigned. When the master table is destroyed, all the slave tables registered at that time are destroyed. A single table is a table that does not depend on (subordinate to) a master table or a slave table, and can be registered or destroyed separately from the master table, and is used for effects that occur arbitrarily in various states, such as effects related to hold. NS. Multiple single tables can be registered at the same time. An ID number is also required when registering a single table, but the ID number is not automatically assigned and is registered in the specified ID number. In the present embodiment, when the master table is destroyed, all the slave tables registered at that time are destroyed, but the slave table is not limited to this and is destroyed. Only the slave table corresponding to the master table may be destroyed. Further, although a plurality of master tables are not registered at the same time, it is conceivable that a plurality of master tables coexist as a result of registering the master tables in order corresponding to the effect to be executed. In such a situation, for example, even if the first master table is destroyed, the second master table is not destroyed by it. At this time, if there is a specific slave table that is the same in the slave table subordinate to the first master table and the slave table subordinate to the second master table, the first master table can also be destroyed. , The specific slave table may not be destroyed. Such a specific slave table can be destroyed in response to the destruction of the second master table.

For example, the direct table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of 13 seconds off defines the following contents.
(1) Table (master table) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of 13 seconds off
1. 1. Call the table group for sending information at the start of fluctuation. If the message for starting symbol fluctuation is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (table for transmitting fluctuation start information) is set as a slave table and the message is transmitted. Set a table for preview production as a slave table in the specified ID 4.270 frame (9s) weight 5. If the message for stopping the symbol fluctuation is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (table for transmitting the fluctuation stop information) is set as a slave table and the message is transmitted. 6.90 frame (3s) wait 7. End of table (destroy the master table)
(2) Table for transmitting fluctuation start information / transmission of fluctuation stop information (slave table)
・ If the message for background information is set in the direct buffer, the message is sent. ・ If the message for numerical symbol information is set in the direct buffer, the message is sent. (3) Table for advance notice (slave table) )
1. 1. If the message for mini character notice is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (table for mini character notice) is set as a slave table and the message is transmitted. 2. 30 frames (1s) wait 3. If the SU notice message is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (SU notice table) is set as a slave table and the message is transmitted. 4.100 frame (about 3.3 s) weight 5. If the message for dialogue notice is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (table for dialogue notice) is set as a slave table, and the message for dialogue notice is sent.

According to the master table and the slave table of (1) to (3) above, the message for starting the symbol fluctuation and the message for stopping the symbol fluctuation and the background information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of 13 seconds off are determined. Message for symbol information, mini character notice, SU notice, and dialogue notice are only stored in the direct buffer, and the message for starting symbol change and the message for background information and numbers are stored in the 0th frame. A message for symbol information and a message for mini character notice are sent, a message for SU notice is sent after 30 frames, a message for dialogue notice is sent after 100 frames, a message for stopping symbol fluctuation and a message for stopping symbol fluctuation after 270 frames, and Messages for background information and numerical symbol information are transmitted. As a result, a series of effect operations are executed according to the transmission (reception) timing of each message. The directory table may directly specify the type and content of the message to be transmitted.

Next, the data configurations of the main control circuit 70 and the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 48.

[Random number judgment table]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a hit random number determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The hit random number determination table (first start port) is "big hit", "small hit", and "miss" based on the random number value for hit determination acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port 44. It is referred to to determine one of the above by lottery. The hit random number determination table (second start port) determines either "big hit" or "loss" by lottery based on the random number value for hit determination acquired when the game ball wins in the second start port 45. It is referred to when doing.

The winning determination random number value is a random number value for determining the lottery result performed when the starting opening prize is won. More specifically, the hit determination random number value is a value indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the hit determination random value is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 44, one of "big hit", "small hit" and "loss" is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the hit random number judgment table (at the time of winning the first start opening), "big hit" and "small hit" are displayed for each value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)"). The range (width) of the random number value for hit judgment in which the winning of each of the "miss" is determined, and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "small hit judgment value data", and "loss judgment value". The relationship with "data") is defined. The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “probability change game state”. When the gaming state is the "probability-changing gaming state", the probability-changing flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "non-probability-changing gaming state", the probability-changing flag is "0".

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation flag is "0" and the winning random number value is any of "0" to "204" at the time of winning the first starting port 44, "big hit" is won. , "Big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the "big hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

If the probability variation flag is "0" and the hit determination random value is any of "205" to "409" at the time of winning the first starting port 44, "small hit" is won and "small hit" is won. "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of "small hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

Further, when the probability change flag is "0" and the random value for hit judgment is neither "0" to "409" at the time of winning the first starting port 44, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is any of "0" to "1092" at the time of winning the first starting port 44, the "big hit" is won and the "big hit" is won. Judgment value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the "big hit" in this case is 1093/65536 (≈1/60), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

If the probability variation flag is "1" and the hit determination random value is any of "1093" to "1297" at the time of winning the first starting port 44, "small hit" is won and "small hit" is won. "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of "small hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319), which is the same as the case where the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, when the probability change flag is "1" and the hit judgment random value is neither "0" to "1297" at the time of winning the first starting port 44, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 44, the jackpot probability varies depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “probability variation game state”. Specifically, the jackpot probability when the game ball wins the first starting port 44 when the game state is the "probability change game state" is about five times higher than when the game state is not the "probability change game state". ..

Similarly, when the probability variation flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is any of "0" to "204" at the time of winning the second starting port 45, "big hit" is won and "big hit" is won. "Big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the "big hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

If the probability variation flag is "0" and the hit judgment random number value is neither "205" to "409" at the time of winning the second starting port 45, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is any of "0" to "1092" at the time of winning the second starting port 45, the "big hit" is won and the "big hit" is won. Judgment value data "is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the "big hit" in this case is 1093/65536 (≈1/60), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

If the probability variation flag is "1" and the hit judgment random number value is neither "0" to "1092" at the time of winning the second starting port 45, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 45, whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the "probability changing game state" without winning the "small hit". Depending on the situation, the jackpot probability fluctuates, and the jackpot probability when the gaming state is in the "probability-changing gaming state" is about five times higher than when it is not in the "probability-changing gaming state".

[Design judgment table]
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) is based on the symbol random value acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 and the above-mentioned judgment value data. Then, it is referred to for selecting the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol. The "hit selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a hit symbol determined according to the hit type at the time of winning, and the "symbol specification command" specifies a symbol to be displayed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It is a command to do. The symbol random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the symbol determination table (first starting port) of the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "49", 50/100. With the probability of, "z0" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "50" to "99", "z1" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99", "z2" is selected as the hit selection symbol command and is used as the symbol designation command. "ZA2" is selected. On the other hand, when the loss judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99", the hit selection symbol command is not selected and "zA3" is used as the symbol specification command. Be selected.

Further, according to the symbol determination table (second starting port) of the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "49", 50 With a probability of / 100, "z3" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "50" to "99", "z4" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. , "ZA5" is selected as the symbol specification command. On the other hand, when the loss judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99", the hit selection symbol command is not selected and "zA6" is used as the symbol specification command. Be selected.

[Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The jackpot type determination table is referred to for determining the jackpot type such as the number of rounds and the ease of winning a V according to the hit selection symbol command related to the jackpot. In the present embodiment, if the jackpot is won regardless of the type of jackpot, the time reduction flag is set to "1" and the number of time reductions is set to, for example, 100 times. Further, the probability variation number is set to, for example, 124 times only when the V prize is won in the big hit game state. The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “time saving game state”. When the gaming state is the "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1", and when the game state is the "non-time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "0". The number of time reductions is the number of fluctuations in the special symbol game in which the time reduction game state can be continued, and the number of probable changes is the number of fluctuations in the special symbol game in which the probability variation game state can be continued. That is, if the special symbol is changed for the number of time reductions (100 times) without winning the big hit in the time reduction game state, the time reduction game state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction game state. If the special symbol changes for the number of probable changes without winning a big hit in the probabilistic game state, the probabilistic game state ends and the game shifts to the non-probable game state.

According to the jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the jackpot is determined because the number of rounds is "10" and it is difficult to win a V prize. When the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and a big hit that makes it easy to win a V is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "4" and the big hit that makes it easy to win a V is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "16" and a big hit that makes it easy to win a V is determined.

[Variation pattern table]
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a table of first half fluctuation patterns, second half fluctuation patterns, and fluctuation patterns in which these are stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. These tables are referred to for determining the fluctuation pattern type and the first half and second half fluctuation patterns based on the winning type at the time of winning, the symbol designation command, and the like. The main CPU 71 transmits a combination of commands corresponding to the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns to the sub-control circuit 200 as fluctuation pattern designation commands. In the following description, a combination of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns is simply referred to as a “fluctuation pattern”.

First, the main CPU 71 determines the type of fluctuation pattern (for example, one of nine types of out-of-order fluctuation patterns and nine types of hit fluctuation patterns) based on the winning type at the time of winning and the symbol designation command, and further responds. Determine the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern. For example, when the "normal fluctuation" of the out-of-range fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern, "none" of the command "00H" is determined as the first half fluctuation pattern, and "low accuracy" of the command "00H" is determined as the second half fluctuation pattern. Either "Variation 1 (4.0 seconds)" or "Low probability variation 2 (8.0 seconds)" of the command "01H" is determined. The fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to such "normal fluctuation" is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 as "0000H" or "0001H" in which the commands of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns are combined. The variation pattern designation command may be described as, for example, "00H00H" or "00H01H".

The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is the total time of the fluctuation times of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns. For example, the fluctuation pattern specification command "0000H" is the sum of the fluctuation time (0 ms) of the first half fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time (4000 ms) of the second half fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "0102H" is the first half. The time (21000 ms) is the sum of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern (11000 ms) and the fluctuation time of the latter half fluctuation pattern (10000 ms). In this way, with regard to the fluctuation pattern, after the rough type is determined, the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns are determined in stages, so that the combination of fluctuation patterns is diversified, and as a result, the variation of the production pattern It can be easily increased.

Note that FIG. 38 shows only 18 types of fluctuation patterns, including hits and misses, for convenience, but of course, it may be more than shown in the figure. "Pseudo 1 to 4" and "special pseudo 1 to 3" are fluctuation patterns corresponding to so-called pseudo series. Although the details will be described later, "pseudo 1 to 4" are provided as a variation pattern for executing a pseudo series such as a normal pseudo series and a high-speed pseudo series. For example, "pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 hits" is, for example, a fluctuation pattern in which a big hit is obtained via normal reach or SP reach after pseudo-continuous execution. "Low probability", "ST", and "latent probability" mean "probability change and non-probability game state", "probability change and time saving game state", and "probability change and non-time saving game state", respectively. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern related to "premier" is set only to the hit fluctuation pattern, but it is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this, and it is "hit" and "V winning easy" or "hit". It may be a fluctuation pattern indicating that there is a richness (high expectation of hitting).

[Game state transition table]
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a game state transition table stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The game state transition table includes V probability failure / V probability success, a hit selection symbol command (z0, z1, z3, z4) indicating a hit symbol, table patterns 1 to 3 described later, and the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game state (z0, z1, z3, z4). 1-700, 701-) is referred to for shifting the gaming state. "Low time order" and "high time order" refer to "non-probability and time-saving game state" and "probability and time-saving game state" in the early stage after the end of the jackpot game state (between 1 to 20 fluctuations in this embodiment). means. "Low time" and "high time" mean "non-probability and time-saving game state" and "probability change and time-saving game state". "Low time final" and "high time final" mean "non-probability and time saving game state" and "probability and time saving game state" in the number of fluctuations (100th time in this embodiment) at which the time saving game state is final. .. "Low" is a "non-probability and non-time saving gaming state" controlled by using a table (also referred to as "low table") in which the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern related to "premier" is relatively low, and "low pre". Is a "non-probability and non-time saving gaming state" controlled by using a table (also referred to as a "low pre-table") in which the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern related to the "premier" is relatively high. The "latent" is a probabilistic non-time saving state, and the "latent final" means a "probable changing and non-time saving gaming state" in the number of fluctuations (124th in the present embodiment) at which the probabilistic gaming state is final. In addition, "latent" is also called "latent". In this embodiment, since the game state is shifted based on the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit, the game state is changed according to the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit for each of the table patterns 1 to 3 described later. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the table patterns 1 to 3 may be switched according to the number of fluctuations after the end of the small hit. Further, as a method of calculating the number of fluctuations after the end of the hit (big hit / small hit), various calculation methods can be adopted by using, for example, a subtraction counter or an addition counter.

The "V probability failure" is the case where the V prize (passing through the specific area 38A) does not occur during the big hit, and the "V probability success" is the case where the V prize occurs during the big hit. The hit selection symbol command "z0" indicating the winning symbol corresponds to a big hit of 10 rounds related to the special drawing 1 (first special symbol) in which V winning is difficult, and "z1" is a special drawing in which V winning is easy. It corresponds to the big hit of 10 rounds related to 1, "z3" corresponds to the big hit of 4 rounds related to the special figure 2 (second special symbol) which is easy to win V, and "z4" is easy to win V. It corresponds to a 16-round jackpot related to special figure 2 (second special symbol). The table pattern 1 is the first table pattern selected after the power is turned on, the table pattern 2 is the table pattern selected after the end of the jackpot game state in which the V probability fails, and the table pattern 3 is the V probability. This is a table pattern that is selected after the successful jackpot game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 39, according to the game state transition table, after the power is turned on, the table pattern 1 is selected, and the game state is "low" until the game state shifts to the big hit game state regardless of the number of fluctuations. In addition, if the V probability fails even after shifting to the big hit game state, table pattern 2 is selected, and as the game state after the big hit ends, the number of fluctuations is "low time order" from 1 to 20 times, 21 to 99. "Low time" until the 100th time, "Low time final", 101-200th time "Low", 201-220th time "Low pre", 221-300th time "Low" again, 301-320th time "Low pre" again, "Low" again from 321 to 400 times, "Low pre" again from 401 to 420 times, "Low" again from 421 to 500 times, "Low pre" again from 501 to 520 times, 521- It becomes "low" again until the 600th time, "low pre" again from the 601 to 620th time, "low" again from the 621 to 700th time, and "low" after the 701th time. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the jackpot game state and the V probability is successful, the table pattern 3 is selected, and as the game state after the jackpot is completed, the number of fluctuations is "high time order" from the 1st to the 20th, and the 21st to 99th. Up to "high time", 100th time "high time final", 101st to 123rd time "latent", 124th time "latent final", 125th time and later in case of table pattern 2 (in case of V probability failure) Similarly, it becomes "low" and "low pre" repeatedly every predetermined number of fluctuations, and becomes "low" after the 701st time.

[Table for selecting fluctuation patterns by game status]
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a table for selecting a variation pattern for each game state stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. The table for selecting a variation pattern for each game state is divided into an off-time and a hit-time, and is referred to for selecting a variation pattern according to various game states. According to the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern according to the game state, "low", "low pre", "low time order", "low time", "low time final", "high time order", "high time", "high time" A variation pattern type (any of nine types of out-of-range variation patterns and nine types of hit variation patterns) is selected with a predetermined probability for each game state such as "final", "latent", and "latent final". When the variation pattern type is selected, the first half and the second half variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern are determined with a predetermined lottery probability, respectively. The variation pattern type also corresponds to the type of effect pattern, and the effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. For example, when the game state is "low" and a low table is used, when "pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 hit" or "pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 premier" or the like is determined as the hit variation pattern corresponding to the big hit, the effect pattern As a method, it is possible to select an effect pattern such as "pseudo 1 to 4 hits" or "pseudo 1 to 4 premiere". On the other hand, when the game state is "low pre" and the low pre-table is used, when "pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 hit" or "pseudo 1 to pseudo 4 premier" or the like is determined as the hit variation pattern corresponding to the big hit, Similarly, as the production pattern, a production pattern such as "pseudo 1 to 4 hits" or "pseudo 1 to 4 premiere" can be selected, but the low pre-table is "pseudo 1 to 4 premier" rather than the low table. The selection probability of the production pattern related to "" is high. On the other hand, the selection probability of the effect pattern related to "pseudo 1 to 4 hits" is higher in the low table than in the low pre-table.

The lottery probabilities of the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns are defined for each fluctuation pattern type according to the number of holdings (number of starting memories), the game state, etc., but the drawing of these lottery probabilities is omitted. In particular, in the case of "low time final", if the jackpot is not won, "ST normal fluctuation" is always selected as the out-of-order fluctuation pattern, and "none" and "ST fluctuation 2 (3 seconds)" are selected as the first half and second half fluctuation patterns. (Variation pattern designation command "00H05H") is uniquely determined, while if a big hit is won, "ST hit" is always selected as the hit fluctuation pattern, and "None" and "None" and "None" are selected as the first half and second half fluctuation patterns. The lottery probability is defined so that the "ST final fluctuation hit" (variation pattern designation command "00H18H") is uniquely determined. Even in the case of "high time final", if the jackpot is not won, "ST normal fluctuation" is always selected as the out-of-order fluctuation pattern, and "none" and "ST final fluctuation" (variation pattern designation) are selected as the first half and second half fluctuation patterns. While the command "00H06H") is uniquely determined, if a big hit is won, "ST hit" is always selected as the hit fluctuation pattern, and "None" and "ST final fluctuation hit" are selected as the first half and second half fluctuation patterns. "(Fluctuating pattern designation command" 00H18H ") is defined so that the lottery probability is uniquely determined. In the case of "latent final", if the jackpot is not won, "latent normal fluctuation" is always selected as the out-of-order fluctuation pattern, and "none" and "latent final fluctuation" as the first half and second half fluctuation patterns ( While the fluctuation pattern specification command "00H0AH") is uniquely determined, if a big hit is won, "latent probability hit" is always selected as the hit fluctuation pattern, and "none" and "latent" are selected as the first half and second half fluctuation patterns. The lottery probability is defined so that "per reach for certainty and latentness" (variation pattern designation command "00H1BH") is uniquely determined.

As shown as an example in FIG. 41, in the case of V probability success, in the "high time order", "04H", "05H", or "14H", "15H" based on the predetermined lottery probability according to the winning result of the big hit. The latter half fluctuation pattern of "" can be selected. At "high time", the latter half fluctuation pattern of "04H", "05H", "07H", or "16H", "17H", "19H" can be selected based on the predetermined lottery probability according to the winning result of the big hit. It is said that. In the "high time final", the latter half fluctuation pattern of "06H" or "18H" can be selected based on a predetermined lottery probability according to the winning result of the big hit. In "latent", "08H", "09H", "0BH", "0CH", or "1AH", "1BH", "1CH", "1DH" based on the predetermined lottery probability according to the winning result of the big hit. The latter half fluctuation pattern of is selectable. In the "latent final", the latter half fluctuation pattern of "0AH" or "1BH" can be selected based on a predetermined lottery probability for each jackpot winning result. By the way, "high time" corresponds to the section in which the story production described later is executed, and "high time" corresponds to the section in which the battle production described later is executed.

The fluctuation pattern related to "premier" may be selected only when the jackpot is won during the probabilistic game state. In the case of a big hit winning related to the second special symbol in a non-probable changing game state such as "low" or "low pre", the fluctuation pattern related to "premier" may always be selected. During the time-saving game state, the variation pattern related to "premier" may be selected only when the big hit related to the second special symbol is won. In the case of a missed winning between "low time final" and "high time final", different missed fluctuation patterns are selected, but the same missed fluctuation pattern may be selected. In the case of a big hit winning related to the second special symbol in "latent", the hit fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern designation command "00H1AH" may be selected. In the present embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern can be selected for "low probability" and "high probability", but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, only in the case of "high probability", even in "high time". The latter half fluctuation pattern of the selectable "19H" may be selectable.

[Variable production table]
The upper two tables in FIG. 42 are diagrams showing fluctuation effect tables (premier low probability, premier high probability) stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. The variation effect table is divided into a premier low probability and a premier high probability, and the sub CPU 201 is referred to for selecting an effect pattern based on the variation pattern designation command. The variation effect table contains the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 70, the corresponding variation time, the random value range and selection rate as the lottery conditions of the sub control circuit 200, and the effect pattern and effect contents as the lottery result. It stipulates. The figure shows an excerpt of a part of the variable effect table. As shown in the figure, in the variable production table (premier low probability, premier high probability), the selection rate of the production pattern related to the premiere (for example, "pseudo 1 premier") is higher than the premier low probability. Is high. On the other hand, for the production patterns other than the premiere (for example, "pseudo 1SP (B)"), the selection rate is higher in the premier low probability than in the premier high probability. The selection rate of "pseudo 1 premier" and "pseudo 1 SP (B)" may be 0 in one of the variable effect tables.

The variable effect table related to such a premier effect is switched according to "low" and "low pre" defined in the game state transition table described above. That is, in the state where it becomes "low" according to the number of fluctuations, there is a relative possibility that the premier production is selected based on the fluctuation pattern related to "premier" by applying the fluctuation production table (premier low probability). On the other hand, in the state where it becomes "low pre" according to the number of fluctuations, there is a possibility that the premier production will be selected based on the fluctuation pattern related to "premier" by applying the fluctuation production table (premier high probability). Is relatively high. In this way, since the variable production table related to the premier production is switched according to the number of fluctuations, the possibility of appearance of the premier production increases or decreases according to the number of fluctuations, and the ease of appearance of the premier production changes. This can enhance your interest. The variable effect table related to the premier effect is managed by the main control circuit 70, and the main CPU 71 may use this table to perform a lottery related to the premier effect.

[Chance production table]
The lower two tables of FIG. 42 are diagrams showing chance effect tables (A pattern, B pattern) stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. The chance effect table is divided into an A pattern and a B pattern, and the sub CPU 201 is referred to for selecting an effect pattern of a chance effect, which will be described later, based on a variation pattern designation command. The chance effect table contains a variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main control circuit 70, a variation time corresponding to the command, a random value range and selection rate as lottery conditions for the sub control circuit 200, and an effect pattern and effect content as a lottery result. It stipulates. The figure shows an excerpt of a part of the chance production table. As shown in the figure, in the chance production table (A pattern), there is a possibility that the production pattern of "normal fluctuation production B" in which the chance production is executed at a relatively late timing may be selected, but the chance is at an early timing. While there is no possibility that the effect pattern of "normal variation effect C" in which the effect is executed is selected, there is a possibility that the effect pattern of the "normal variation effect C" is selected in the chance effect table (B pattern). There is now. The fluctuation effect table (premier low probability), variation effect table (premier high probability), chance effect table (A pattern), and chance effect table (B pattern) shown in FIG. 42 are all shown as examples. Yes, when the chance production table (A pattern) is used instead of the variable production table (premier low probability), the case where the chance production table (B pattern) is used instead of the variable production table (premier high probability) is shown. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the selection rates of the chance production table (A pattern) and the chance production table (B pattern) are such that there is no chance production, the chance production is executed at a late timing, and the chance production is performed at an early timing. It is also possible to control the execution selection rate so that it is executed in various effects other than the normal variable effect.

[Look-ahead production table]
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a look-ahead effect table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. The look-ahead effect table is referred to by the sub CPU 201 for selecting an effect pattern related to the so-called look-ahead effect based on the variation pattern designation command. The look-ahead effect table defines a variable pattern designation command, a random value range, a selection rate, an effect pattern that is a lottery result, and an effect content. The figure shows an excerpt of a part of the look-ahead production table. As shown in the figure, in the look-ahead effect table, the look-ahead effect described later is determined based on the variation pattern designation command.

[Production pattern determination table]
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an effect pattern determination table (for a normal stage, for a specific stage) stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. The effect pattern determination table is divided into a normal stage and a specific stage, and is referred to by the sub CPU 201 for selecting an effect pattern for battle effect based on a variable pattern designation command. The effect pattern determination table includes a variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main control circuit 70, a variation time corresponding to the command, a random value range and selection rate as lottery conditions for the sub control circuit 200, and an effect pattern and effect content as a lottery result. Is stipulated. The figure shows an excerpt of a part of the production pattern determination table. As shown in the figure, in the effect pattern determination table (for the normal stage and for the specific stage), the selection rate of the “major role straddle effect” described later is higher for the specific stage than for the normal stage. Such a production pattern determination table is a probabilistic and time-saving game game state ("high time order", "high time", "high time final"), and a probabilistic and non-time-saving game game state ("latent", "hidden final"). ). The latter half fluctuation pattern "19H" may be selected only in the case of a 16R jackpot. Further, in the present embodiment, a production pattern that can be selected in a non-probable and time-saving game state (“low time order”, “low time”, “low time final”) and a probable change and time-saving game state (“high time order”) , "High time", "High time final"), the selectable production patterns are the same, but may be different. The effect pattern related to the hit at the time of fluctuation in the “final latent” is different from the effect pattern related to the hit at the time of fluctuation in the “final at high time”, and may not be the effect pattern dedicated to the “final latent”. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of stages. For example, there may be a plurality of stages classified into a normal stage and a plurality of stages classified into a specific stage. Further, various combinations are conceivable, such as a case where one stage exists and the other stage exists independently, or a case where all stages exist independently.

[High-speed pseudo-ream]
FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high-speed pseudo-ream. In the present embodiment, high-speed pseudo-ream is performed when the first half fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2", "pseudo 3", and "pseudo 4". Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect of temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern while swaying and fluctuating, and then displaying the fluctuation again, and the high-speed pseudo-ream is a re-variation display pattern having a relatively short span (for example, 3. It means a pseudo-ream including 5s or 7s). In this embodiment, as described below with reference to FIG. 45, eight types of high-speed pseudo-reams are provided for convenience.

"Pseudo 1" is an effect of performing a high-speed pseudo-ream three or four times within a time corresponding to one normal pseudo-ream (for example, 14 s). In the high-speed pseudo-ream three times, the re-variation display pattern such as 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 7 s (development 1) is repeatedly executed. In the high-speed pseudo-ream four times, the revariable display pattern such as 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (development 1) is repeatedly executed. In addition, "stage 1", "development 1", etc. mean the display mode of the decorative pattern and the content of the effect.

"Pseudo 2" is an effect of performing a high-speed pseudo-ream eight times within a time (for example, 28s or 35s) corresponding to two normal pseudo-reams. In the high-speed pseudo-ream 8 times (A), 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (development 1) → 3.5 s (stage 2) → The revariable display pattern such as 3.5 s (stage 2) → 3.5 s (stage 2) → 3.5 s (development 2) is repeatedly executed. In the high-speed pseudo-ream 8 times (B), 3.5s (stage 1) → 3.5s (stage 1) → 7s (development 1) → 3.5s (stage 2) → 3.5s (stage 2) → 7s ( The revariable display pattern such as development 2) → 3.5s (stage 3) → 3.5s (development 3) is repeatedly executed.

"Pseudo 3" is an effect in which the high-speed pseudo-ream is performed 13 or 15 times within a time corresponding to three normal pseudo-reams (for example, 52.5 s). In the high-speed pseudo-ream 13 times, 3.5s (stage 1) → 3.5s (stage 1) → 7s (development 1) → 3.5s (stage 2) → 3.5s (stage 2) → 7s (development 2) → 3.5s (stage 3) → 3.5s (development 3) → 3.5s (stage 4) → 3.5s (stage 4) → 3.5s (stage 4) → 3.5s (stage 4) → 3 A revariable display pattern such as .5s (development 4) is repeatedly executed. In the high-speed pseudo-ream 15 times, 33.5s (stage 1) → 3.5s (stage 1) → 3.5s (stage 1) → 3.5s (development 1) → 3.5s (stage 2) → 3.5s (Stage 2) → 3.5s (Stage 2) → 3.5s (Development 2) → 3.5s (Stage 3) → 3.5s (Development 3) → 3.5s (Stage 4) → 3.5s (Stage 2) 4) → 3.5s (stage 4) → 3.5s (stage 4) → 3.5s (development 4) The revariable display pattern is repeatedly executed.

"Pseudo 4" is an effect of performing high-speed pseudo-ream 19 or 20 times within a time (for example, 70 s) corresponding to 4 times of normal pseudo-ream. In 19 high-speed pseudo-runs, 33.5s (stage 1) → 3.5s (stage 1) → 3.5s (stage 1) → 3.5s (development 1) → 3.5s (stage 2) → 3.5s (Stage 2) → 3.5s (Stage 2) → 3.5s (Development 2) → 3.5s (Stage 3) → 3.5s (Development 3) → 3.5s (Stage 4) → 3.5s (Stage 2) 4) → 3.5s (stage 4) → 3.5s (stage 4) → 3.5s (development 4) → 3.5s (stage 5) → 3.5s (stage 5) → 3.5s (stage 5) → The re-variation display pattern such as 7s (development 5) is repeatedly executed. In the high-speed pseudo-ream 20 times, 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (stage 1) → 3.5 s (development 1) → 3.5 s (stage 2) → 3.5 s (Stage 2) → 3.5s (Stage 2) → 3.5s (Development 2) → 3.5s (Stage 3) → 3.5s (Development 3) → 3.5s (Stage 4) → 3.5s (Stage 2) 4) → 3.5s (stage 4) → 3.5s (stage 4) → 3.5s (development 4) → 3.5s (stage 5) → 3.5s (stage 5) → 3.5s (stage 5) The revariable display pattern such as → 3.5 s (stage 5) → 3.5 s (development 5) is repeatedly executed. In particular, in the high-speed pseudo-ream 20 times, the temporary stop is performed 19 times at the so-called loose stitches (for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern such as "556"), and the left and right stitches (for example, "5 ↓ 5") are left and right. Temporary stop is performed once in the display mode) in which the decorative symbols of the above are the same and the decorative symbols in the center are displayed in a variable manner. A normal pseudo-ream or a high-speed pseudo-ream may be executable over a plurality of variations.

[Button repeated hit rank up scenario table]
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a button repeated hit rank-up scenario table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. The button continuous hitting rank-up scenario table is referred to for selecting a threshold value (LV1 to LV1 to 4) and a lottery pattern for determining the rank-up of the effect content when the effect button 23 is used for the button continuous operation effect described later. In the button repeated hit rank-up scenario table, for example, the operation effective time of the effect button 23 divided every 300 ms, the scenario (1 to 8) selected in advance for the button repeated hit effect, and the threshold value determined according to the operation effective time for each scenario. (LV1 to 4) and the rank-up lottery pattern described later are specified. In the button repeated hitting effect, a lottery is performed every time the effect button 23 is operated to decide whether or not to give points based on the rank-up lottery pattern described later, and the cumulative value of the points given according to the lottery result ( When the level) becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value (LV1 to 4) in the predetermined operation effective time, the rank is increased to LV1 to 4 according to the threshold value. The initial level of rank-up is LV0, and when the rank is finally raised to LV4, an effect of displaying, for example, an icon image is executed so as to suggest that the expectation of a big hit is high. The threshold value becomes higher as it becomes LV1, LV2, LV3, and LV4. The degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested not only in the button repeated hitting effect but also in other effects, and the contents of the table that defines the effect pattern as corresponding to the probability of becoming a "big hit" when each effect pattern is executed. It is supposed to be calculated arithmetically from.

For example, when scenario 4 is selected, it is determined whether or not the cumulative value of points given based on the rank-up lottery pattern has reached the threshold value LV2 from the operation effective time to 0 to 900 ms. At this time, since the difference between the threshold value LV2 and the initial level LV0 is 2 or more, the rank-up lottery pattern is set with a high probability, and points are easily given. As a result, when the accumulated points reach the threshold value LV2, the rank is increased to LV2 according to the threshold value. On the other hand, if the cumulative point value does not reach the threshold value LV2, the initial level LV0 is maintained. Next, from the operation effective time of 900 to 2400 ms, it is determined whether or not the cumulative value of the points given based on the rank-up lottery pattern has reached the higher threshold value LV3. At this time, if the level based on the accumulated points at the present time is LV2, the level difference between the LV2 and the threshold value LV3 is less than 2, so a low probability is set as the rank-up lottery pattern and points are given. It becomes difficult. As a result, if the accumulated points do not reach the threshold value LV3, the level LV2 or LV0 is maintained. On the other hand, when the accumulated points reach the threshold value LV3, the rank is increased to LV3 corresponding to the threshold value.

Similarly, from the operation effective time of 2400 to 3600 ms, it is determined whether or not the accumulated point value has reached the threshold value LV4, and if the accumulated point value has not reached the threshold value LV4, the level is maintained at LV3, LV2, or LV0. On the other hand, when the accumulated points reach the threshold value LV4, the rank is raised to the level LV4 corresponding to the threshold value. Further, during the operation effective time of 3600 to 6000 ms, points are not given because the rank-up lottery pattern is set to "No" described later. As a result, the current level will be maintained. In this way, when the level difference between the current level and the threshold value becomes large to some extent, such as 2 or more, the rank-up lottery pattern has a high probability, and as a result, the accumulated points value even if the number of operations within the operation effective time is small. Is likely to increase, which in turn makes it easier to rank up. In addition, the rank-up lottery pattern also has "success or failure" described later, and in the case of this "success or failure", although it is more difficult to give points than the low probability, the probability of giving points may be 0. There is a certain probability that points will be awarded. As shown in FIG. 46, a threshold value that is an upper limit of LV1 to LV1 is set for each operation effective time, but the threshold value is not limited to this, and for example, LV1 has a predetermined probability (for example, 1/250). Exception handling may be performed so that the level rises beyond the upper limit of ~ 4. For example, when the operation effective time of scenario 2 is 300, as a result of operating the effect button 23, a rank-up lottery is performed, and if the lottery result is won with a probability of 1/250, the level is exceptionally changed from LV1 to LV4. Can be increased.

[Rank-up lottery table]
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a rank-up lottery table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. The rank-up lottery table is referred to together with the button repeated hit rank-up scenario table described above. The rank-up lottery table is promoted (with points) or not (points are given) for each rank-up lottery pattern ("no lottery", "low probability", "high probability", "success", "no"). The lottery probability of whether to set (none) is specified. The rank-up lottery pattern "no lottery" is selected when the LV4 is finally reached based on the button repeated hit rank-up scenario table. The "low probability" and "high probability" of the rank-up lottery pattern are applied when referring to the corresponding threshold values "LV1 to 4" in the button repeated hit rank-up scenario table, and the difference between the current level and the threshold value is 2 If it is less than, "low probability" (100/250) is applied as the probability of promotion (with points given), while if the difference between the current level and the threshold value is 2 or more, there is promotion (with points given). ) Is applied as "high probability" (200/250). The "success" and "failure" of the rank-up lottery pattern are applied when referring to "success / failure" and "failure" in the button repeated hit rank-up scenario table, and in "success / failure", the probability of promotion (with points). There is a possibility that points will be given at 50/250, so there is a possibility of rank up, while with "No", the probability of promotion (with points given) is 0 and points are not given, so rank up. There is no possibility of.

Hereinafter, various processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 48 to 83.

[Processing when power is turned on]
FIG. 48 shows the power-on processing by the main CPU 71. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 sets an initial value in the stack pointer (S11).

Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON (S12). The power failure detection signal is turned ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, for example. When the power failure detection signal is ON, the main CPU 71 determines that it is in the power failure detection state, and repeats the process of S12 until the power failure detection signal is turned OFF. When the power failure detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 71 determines that it is in the power failure detection state, and proceeds to the process of S13.

In S13, the main CPU 71 permits access to the RWM (main RAM).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a sub-control reception reception wait process that waits until the sub-control circuit 200 can receive a signal (S14).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs initialization processing for various devices built in the CPU (S15).

Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (S16). The backup clear signal is a signal for instructing the clear of the backup contents of the main RAM 73 provided in the main CPU 71 constituting the main control circuit 70 and the RAM (not shown) constituting the payout / emission control circuit 300. .. When the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S23. When the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S17.

In S17, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power failure detection flag is set on. The power failure detection flag is a flag indicating that the power failure process has been executed in response to the occurrence of the power failure. When the power failure detection flag is set on, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S18. When the power failure detection flag is set off, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S23.

In S18, the main CPU 71 checks the main RAM 73 for work area damage using, for example, a checksum.

Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the work area is normal (S19). When the work area is normal, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S23.

In S20, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value at the time of power failure recovery.

Next, the main CPU 71 sets a notification about the high-probability gaming state (probability-changing gaming state) at the time of restoration of the power failure (S21).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 200 (S22). When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the power-on process.

In S23, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the work area of the main RAM 73.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value at the time of RWM (main RAM) initialization (S24).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub-control circuit 200 (S25).

Next, the main CPU 71 executes the variation pattern table setting process (S26). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the power-on process.

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 49 shows the system timer interrupt process by the main CPU 71. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 73 (S31).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (32).

Next, the main CPU 71 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (S34).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a command output process for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (S35).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a game information output process for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (S36). The game information is information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, the hall computer, and the like. ..

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the values of the saved registers (S37). When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection process]
FIG. 50 shows the switch input detection process by the main CPU 71. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 executes the start opening winning detection process (S41). The starting port winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (S42). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning openings 51 and 52 is set.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S43). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54 is set.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random value) of the normal symbol game is acquired according to the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector 43. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Starting opening winning detection process]
FIG. 51 shows the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 71. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting port winning ball sensor 44a (S51). When the game ball is detected by the first start opening winning ball sensor 44a, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first start opening winning ball sensor 44a, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S59.

In S52, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting payout information according to the first start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start opening prizes (the number of reserved first special symbols) is less than four (S53). If the number of reserved items is less than 4, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S54. When the number of reserved pieces is 4, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S59.

In S54, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

Next, the main CPU 71 acquires a hit determination random value and a symbol random value, and performs a process of storing these random values in the main RAM 73 (S55).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs the first special stop symbol determination process (S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the hit random number determination table (first start port), the symbol determination table (first start port), and the jackpot type determination table are referred to based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value. , The symbol designation command and the hit selection symbol command related to the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed are determined.

Next, the main CPU 71 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern related to the first special symbol is determined by referring to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, the determination value data, the game state, and the table pattern. The fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening winning (S58). The hold number increase command of the first start opening winning is a command indicating that the hold number of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S57, the sub-control circuit 200 is reached. Will be sent.

Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start opening winning ball sensor 45a (S59). When the game ball is detected by the second start opening winning ball sensor 45a, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S60. When the game ball is not detected by the second start opening winning ball sensor 45a, the main CPU 71 ends the starting opening winning detection process.

In S60, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting payout information according to the second starting port winning.

Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of reserved second start opening prizes (the number of reserved second special symbols) is less than four (S61). If the number of reserved items is less than 4, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S62. When the number of reserved pieces is 4, the main CPU 71 ends the start opening winning detection process.

In S62, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second start opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 71 acquires a hit determination random value and a symbol random value, and performs a process of storing these random values in the main RAM 73 (S63).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs the second special stop symbol determination process (S64). Similar to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process also has a hit random number determination table (second start port) and a symbol determination table (second) based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value. With reference to the start port) and the jackpot type determination table, the symbol designation command and the hit selection symbol command related to the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed are determined.

Next, the main CPU 71 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (S65). This variation pattern determination process also refers to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, the determination value data, the game state, and the table pattern, and determines the variation pattern related to the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening winning (S66). The hold number increase command for the second start opening prize is a command indicating that the hold number of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and the command and the like indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S65 are transferred to the sub-control circuit 200. Will be sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the start opening winning detection process.

[Variation pattern determination process]
FIG. 52 shows the fluctuation pattern determination process by the main CPU 71. The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 refers to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the table pattern, the hit determination random value, and the symbol random value, which will be described later, and selects the variation pattern type. (S71).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of selecting the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns from the selected fluctuation pattern types based on a predetermined lottery probability (S72). When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the variation pattern determination process.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 53 shows the main control main process by the main CPU 71. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main CPU 71 performs an initial setting process (S81) as shown in the figure. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs the above-mentioned process such as the power-on process.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs the initial value random number update process (S82). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process (S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol control process (S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a symbol display device control process (S85). In this process, the main CPU 71 drives the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62 according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 73 in S83 and S84. The control signal of is stored in the main RAM 73. As a result, the main CPU 71 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display device 61 and the ordinary symbol display device 62, and the special symbol display device 61 and the ordinary symbol display device 62 transmit the special symbol or the ordinary symbol based on the received control signal. Is displayed as a variable display and a stop display.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a game information data generation process (S86). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates a game state command related to the game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer, and stores the game state command in the main RAM 73.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a storage / game state data generation process (S87). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 73. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S82.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 54 shows a special symbol control process by the main CPU 71. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “08”) shown in parentheses on the left side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 54, the main CPU 71 performs a process of loading the control state flag (S91). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute each of the processes S92 to S100 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of S92 to S100 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 71 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of S92 to S100. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 49) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol memory check process (S92). In this process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of holds for variable display of the special symbol when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process, and when the number of holds is not “0”. (If there is a reserved ball), the hit determination result, the special symbol determination result, the special symbol variation pattern determination result, etc. obtained in the start opening winning detection process are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process (S93) described later, and corresponds to the variation pattern acquired in this process. Set the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol variation time management process described later is executed after the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 71 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (S93). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control status flag displays the special symbol described later. A value (“02”) indicating the time management process (S94) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of S93 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol display time management process (S94). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and when the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of S93 has elapsed, the result of the hit determination is reached. Is a "big hit" or a "small hit". Then, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag with a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process (S95) described later. Set the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of S94 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 71 sets a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing (S100) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, the special symbol game end processing described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a jackpot start interval management process (S95). In this process, the main CPU 71 has a control state flag having a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of S94 has elapsed, the first In order to open the large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54, the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 72. Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (S96), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) of the large winning opening. ) Is set in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, it is set so that the process during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (S96). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening, the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number and the opening are performed. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has passed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the first special winning opening 53 or the second special winning opening 54. Then, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag with a value (“05”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (S97), which will be described later, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. .. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the large winning opening set in S97 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the process during opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (S97). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value (“05”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time elapses, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“06”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 71 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S97 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval time). ) Is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 71 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (S98). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 71 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (S96) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 71 performs the big hit end interval processing (S99). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 71 is a value indicating the jackpot end interval process (“07”), and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval elapses, a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“07”). 08 ") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of S99. At this time, if the V winning during the big hit is successful, the main CPU 71 controls to shift the gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state, and if the V winning during the big hit fails, the gaming state is not changed. Controls the transition to the probabilistic gaming state. When the big hit symbol is a symbol corresponding to the "small hit", the main CPU 71 controls to maintain the gaming state.

Next, when the big hit game state or the small hit game state ends, or when the "loss" is won, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol game end process (S100). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 71 stores and updates the data indicating the number of held items (starting storage information) so as to decrease by “1”. do. Further, the main CPU 71 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the fluctuation of the special symbol next time. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of S100, the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (S92) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the game state is neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state and the result of the hit determination is "miss", the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags to "00", "01", and " Set in the order of "02" and "08". As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (S92), special symbol variation time management process (S93), special symbol display time management process (S94), and special symbol game end process (S100) in this order. Execute at a predetermined timing.

Further, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags to "00" and "01". , "02", "03" in that order. As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (S92), special symbol variation time management process (S93), special symbol display time management process (S94), and jackpot start interval management process (S95) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-mentioned processing during opening of the large winning opening (S96), monitoring processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening (S57), and waiting time management processing before reopening of the large winning opening (S98) in this order at predetermined timings. And execute a big hit game or a small hit game.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 71 performs the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (S96), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (S97), big hit end interval processing (S99), and special symbol game end processing (S100) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 60 described later) of S84 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 53 also branches the processing flow according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return processing from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 55 shows a special symbol memory check process by the main CPU 71. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 71 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 73 by a load process (S111).

Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process (S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00", the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S113.

In S113, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the second start opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) is "0". When it is determined that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is not "0", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S114. When it is determined that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is "0", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S119.

In S114, the main CPU 71 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the number of reserved second start opening prizes. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73, and determines whether or not the data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is changing or pending. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the changing second special symbol is stored as start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol for four times held. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a hit determination random value, a symbol random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. acquired at the time of winning the second start port 45. Is done.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning (S115). In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S116.

In S116, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a big hit / small hit determination process (S117). In this process, the main CPU 71 is set to the jackpot determination random value that is extracted at the time of winning the start opening and is set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is acquired by referring to the hit judgment table (see FIG. 35) corresponding to the type of the winning start opening. Then, the main CPU 71 determines (hits determination) which of the "big hit", "small hit", and "loss" is won based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, the main CPU 71 sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer (S118). When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol memory check process.

In S119, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the first start opening winning (variable display of the first special symbol) is "0". When it is determined that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not "0", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S120. When it is determined that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S122.

In S120, the main CPU 71 subtracts "1" from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the number of reserved first start opening prizes. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73, and determines whether or not the data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is changing or pending. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol for four times held. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a hit determination random value, a symbol random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. acquired at the time of winning the first start port 44. Is done.

Next, a special symbol memory transfer process is performed based on the first start opening winning (S121). In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S116.

In S122, the main CPU 71 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 71 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol memory check process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 56 shows the special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 71. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S132.

In S132, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation start waiting time) after the fluctuation is confirmed set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S133.

In S133, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S142. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S134.

In S134, the main CPU 71 further determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "small hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "small hit", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S137. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "small hit", that is, when the special symbol game is "missing", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S135.

In S135, the main CPU 71 performs a time saving / probability variation number subtraction process. The time reduction / probability variation number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (S136). When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In S137, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S138.

In S138, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (S139).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 73 (S140). As a result, a big hit start command or a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 71 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 37), and sets the upper limit of the number of rounds (upper limit of the number of open winning openings) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designation command) in the main RAM 73. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (S141). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In S142, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S143.

In S143, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the time saving state change number counter, the time saving flag, and the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S138.

[Time reduction / probability variation number subtraction processing]
FIG. 57 shows the time reduction / probability variation number subtraction process by the main CPU 71. The time reduction / probability variation number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time saving state fluctuation number counter is 0 (S151). The time saving state fluctuation counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time saving number (100 times as an example in this embodiment) becomes 0. When the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S155. If the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S152.

In S152, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter.

Next, the main CPU 71 again determines whether or not the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter is 0 (S153). When the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S154. If the value of the time saving state fluctuation counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S155.

In S154, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" as a time saving flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S155.

In S155, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the probability change state change number counter is 0. The probability change state fluctuation counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set probability change number (124 times as an example in this embodiment) becomes 0. When the value of the probability change state change number counter is 0, the main CPU 71 ends the time saving / probability change number subtraction process. If the value of the probability change state change counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S156.

In S156, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability change state change counter.

Next, the main CPU 71 again determines whether or not the value of the probability change state fluctuation counter is 0 (S157). When the value of the probability change state change number counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S158. If the value of the probability change state fluctuation counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 ends the time saving / probability change number subtraction process.

In S158, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" as a probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the time saving / probability variation number subtraction process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 58 shows the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 71. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (S161: NO), the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing, the main CPU 71 shifts to the processing of S162.

In S162, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S163.

In S163, the main CPU 71 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 71 clears the round number distribution flag (S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54 is periodically inserted a predetermined number of times even during one round. It is a flag to indicate whether or not to open and close. If the first prize opening 53 or the second prize opening 54 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a special symbol hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (S165).

Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (S166). When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S167. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S174.

In S167, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the V winning is successful during the big hit (S168). If the V prize is successful, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S169. If the V winning is unsuccessful, the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S171.

In S169, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting "1" as a probability change flag.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined probability change number (124 times as an example in this embodiment) in the probability change state change number counter (S170).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting "1" as a time saving flag (S171).

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a specified time reduction number of times (100 times as an example in this embodiment) in the time reduction state fluctuation number counter (S172).

Next, the main CPU 71 executes the variation pattern table setting process (S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In S174, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the value of the small hit flag.

Next, the main CPU 71 executes the above-mentioned time saving / probability variation number subtraction process (S175). When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 59 shows the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 71. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the power-on time process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power is turned on (S181). When the power is turned on, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S182. If the power is not turned on, the main CPU 71 shifts to the process of S183.

In S182, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table.

Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation flag is "1" (S183). When the value of the probability change flag is "1", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S184. When the value of the probability change flag is "0", the main CPU 71 moves to the process of S185.

In S184, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

In S185, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

[Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 60 shows a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 71. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the left side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 60 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and the normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 73. It is stored in a predetermined storage area inside. The main CPU 71 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 60, the main CPU 71 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (S191). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes of S192 to S196 described later based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any processing of S162 to S166 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 71 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of S162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 49) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol memory check process (S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the hold number is “0”. If not, processing such as hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (S193) described later in the normal symbol control state flag, and waits for the fluctuation time determined in this process. Set in the time timer. That is, it is set so that the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process described later is executed after the determined normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed by the process of S192.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (S193). In this process, in the main CPU 71, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the normal symbol control state flag will be added to the normal symbol control state flag, which will be described later. A value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (S194) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of S193 is set so that the normal symbol display time monitoring process, which will be described later, is executed after the set waiting time after confirmation has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (S194). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and when the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of S193 has elapsed, the hit determination is made. Judge whether or not the result of is a "hit". Then, when the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 71 performs the normal electric accessory release setting process, and the value indicating the normal electric accessory release process (S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag ("" 03 ") is set. That is, this process is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not "hit", the main CPU 71 sets a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end processing (S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game end processing described later is executed.

Next, when the result of the hit determination is determined to be "hit" in S194, the main CPU 71 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 71 is said to have received a predetermined number of prizes during the opening of the normal electric accessory 46. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the blade-shaped member which is the ordinary electric accessory 46. Then, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end processing (S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

Next, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol game end process (S196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 71 reduces the data indicating the number of held variable displays of the normal symbol by “1”. Update the memory to. Further, the main CPU 71 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variation display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the processing of S196, the above-mentioned normal symbol memory check processing (S192) is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub-control circuit 200 executes the sub-control circuit main process. This sub-control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. The sub-control circuit main process is a process started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 61, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (S201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (S202). When the watchdog timer is started, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set, and when the service pulse is not written (at the time-out), the power interruption process is executed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the operation means input process (S203). The operation means input process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the command analysis process (S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect mode determination process (S205). The effect mode determination process is composed of subroutines such as a probability change effect control process, an interface notice setting process, a pseudo continuous effect determination process, a V effect setting process, a button continuous effect setting process, a safe mode setting process, and a special effect setting process, which will be described later. .. These processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 to 84. As shown in FIG. 62, when each process of the effect mode determination process determines a mode related to the effect such as a variable effect pattern, an effect pattern, a notice effect content, an effect effect, etc., the effect is shown. Information is generated.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the command transmission process (S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, in the command transmission process, the above-mentioned message (effect designation information) is generated based on the effect information, and this message is transmitted to each control circuit.

Next, the display control circuit 205 executes the drawing control process (S207). In this process, the display control circuit 205 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 13 based on a message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the voice control circuit 206 executes the voice control process (S208). In this process, the voice control circuit 206 performs voice control for causing the speaker 11 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the LED control circuit 207 executes the LED control process (S209). In this process, the LED control circuit 207 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the drive control circuit 208 executes the accessory control process (S210). In this process, the drive control circuit 208 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motors 60A to 60E related to the movable accessory based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process of S201 is completed, each process of S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[Button input interrupt processing]
FIG. 63 shows the button input interrupt process by the sub CPU 201. The button input interrupt process is executed in parallel with the sub-control circuit main process, for example, every 1 ms by updating the timer for measurement. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an input signal from the effect button switch 230 (S221). When there is an input signal from the effect button switch 230, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S222. When there is no input signal from the effect button switch 230, the sub CPU 201 ends the button input interrupt process.

In S222, the sub CPU 201 determines the operation state of the effect button 23 based on the input signal from the effect button switch 230, and generates information indicating the operation state. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the button input interrupt process.

[Operation means input processing]
FIG. 64 shows an operation means input process by the sub CPU 201. The operation means input process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 acquires the operation state based on the information indicating the operation state (S231). The operation state includes the number of times the effect button 23 is pressed, the jog dial 24, the rotation direction, the rotation angle, and the rotation speed. The effect is determined according to the operating state. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the operation means input process.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 65 shows the command analysis process by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203 after receiving from the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 71) (S241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (S242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data is correct or missing.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of production (presence or absence of dialogue notice, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) is selected as the production pattern. The effect content (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process separately made into a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the effect content to be executed based on the effect pattern is selected as the effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

[Command transmission process]
FIG. 66 shows a command transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 205 to 208 (S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the directory table registration process (S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a direct table corresponding to the message stored in the direct buffer and the effect information in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the message transmission process (S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and transmits the message to the predetermined control circuits 205 to 208. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 67 shows a message setting process by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets the device (control circuit 205-208) to be transmitted based on the effect information (S261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the presence / absence of system operation (S262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage information and each effect information (S263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the notice pattern (S264). As a result, the directory buffer stores a device (control circuit 205-208) as a transmission destination, presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[Direct table registration process]
FIG. 68 shows the directory table registration process by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a single table (S271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (S272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the slave table used in the master table (S273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as the slave table (S274). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the directory table registration process.

[Message sending process]
FIG. 69 shows a message transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direction buffer corresponding to the direction table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuit 205-208) according to the "destination device" set in the message. Is performed (S281).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary directory table after the message transmission is completed (S282). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[Probability change production control processing]
FIG. 70 shows the effect control process during probabilistic change by the sub CPU 201. The probabilistic change effect control process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determination process of S205 described above, and is called to determine the effect mode in the probabilistic game state when the effect mode determination process is executed. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation flag is "1" (S291). The value of the probability change flag can be determined based on the storage / game state data transmitted from the main control circuit 70. When the value of the probability change flag is "1", the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S292. If the value of the probabilistic change flag is not "1", the sub CPU 201 ends the probabilistic change effect control process.

In S292, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is 99 or less. The number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is counted by accumulating the number of fluctuations as the number of fluctuations each time the special symbol effect start command is received when the special symbol per end display command is received. When the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit is 99 times or less, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is "high time" or "high time", and proceeds to the process of S293. If the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is not 99 or less but 100 or more, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S294.

In S293, the sub CPU 201 executes the story & battle effect selection process. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect control process during the probability change. The story & battle production selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

Here, the story production, the battle production, and the related major role straddling production will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87.

As shown in FIG. 85, the story production is a production of a video display that can be executed while the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit is 1 to 20 times (story production section corresponding to the high time order), and the main character is used as a motif. An image with a narrative story is displayed. The battle production is a video display production that can be executed from the end of the story production to 99 fluctuations (mainly the battle production section corresponding to high time), and is a predetermined boss character (mainly a predetermined boss character that is an enemy to the main character). Hereinafter, a video showing a win or loss (in the present embodiment, "defeat" in the case of a win) is displayed by confronting with a "boss").

The story production is prepared as video data from the first episode to a predetermined final episode, such as story production 1, 2, 3, ..., and the unit is a predetermined time (for example, 25 s) for each story. Is executed. Such a story production always ends before the change of the decorative symbol (special symbol) ends (stops) at the 20th change number. For example, as shown in FIG. 85, the story production may end at the 15th variation. In this case, the story production ends during the 15th fluctuation of the number of fluctuations, and the battle production shifts to the start of the next 16th fluctuation of the number of fluctuations. Is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 86, the battle effect is prepared as video data in which predetermined bosses 1, 2, 3, ... Corresponding to a plurality of stages, which will be described later, appear from the next fluctuation after the story effect is completed. .. For example, after the end of the story effect 1, if a battle effect to defeat the boss 1 is executed in a confrontation with the boss 1, the story effect 2 is executed after the end of the next big hit, and after the end of the story effect 2, the boss 2 is executed. When the battle production to defeat the boss 2 is executed in the confrontation with, the story production 3 is further executed after the end of the next big hit, and so on, the story production 1 until all the predetermined bosses are finally defeated. The battle production according to 2, 3, ... Is repeatedly executed. In the battle production, various enemy characters appear not only in the predetermined boss, while in the story production, the predetermined boss that appears in the corresponding stage is always introduced, and it is specified separately from the enemy character. Unless you defeat the boss of, story productions 1, 2, 3, ... will not progress. Therefore, for example, in the battle production, if a big hit is achieved without defeating the boss, the battle production section may be set and the battle production may be executed again after the jackpot ends. As a result, if the story production is not executed after the hit ends and the battle production section is entered, or if the story production is completed at the 15th time and the battle production section is started from the 16th time as in the above example, The battle effect will be executed before the number of fluctuations is 20 times from the end of the hit. Therefore, in the "high time order", it is possible to execute the battle effect based on the selected fluctuation pattern. In other words, the battle effect can be executed even if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected from the table corresponding to "high time" is shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected from the table corresponding to "high time". It also has a directing effect.

In the present embodiment, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the story production, the battle production is started after the power failure is restored. For example, after the power failure is restored, the same boss as before the power failure is made to appear. The content of the story production itself may be advanced on the condition that. The progress of the production content means that the story production to be executed is changed from the first episode to the second episode, for example, the opponent's character changes with respect to the main character, and the difficulty of completing the mission becomes higher. It means that the stage of production changes by switching characters, switching backgrounds, switching sounds, etc., including cases such as changing from easy to normal or hard. Further, in the present embodiment, when all the fluctuation patterns of the special symbols in the story production section correspond to the loss, it is assumed that the type of the fluctuation pattern is the shortest fluctuation time of 1.3 s in "ST normal fluctuation". As a result, the story production section is defined as a period corresponding to at least 20 × 1.3 = 26 (s). As a result, the story production is controlled so as to end in a time (production time) of about 25s at the longest. However, the story production is not limited to the above production time, and the production time may be defined according to the longest fluctuation time. Further, if the production time cannot be completed within the story production section, the story production may be forcibly ended, or a part of the battle production section may be assigned to the story production. Further, in the present embodiment, the story production and the battle production are uniquely associated with any one of a plurality of stages that determine the production scene, the situation, and the like, and the predetermined bosses 1 and 2 to be defeated with each stage. 3, ... Are uniquely associated with each other. The plurality of stages are classified into a normal stage and a specific stage, and when all the story effects are executed and all the battle effects to defeat the predetermined boss are executed, the player operates the operation means (effect button 23, etc.). It is possible to select the stage using. The stage may be selected during the jackpot (the jackpot start interval and the jackpot end interpal may be included), or at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation, during the probabilistic and time-saving gaming state (ST)). It may be possible during the demo display, in a section where the fluctuation is not performed, etc.), or may be possible at any timing during the normal game state or ST according to the input of the password, for example.

In addition, basically, the battle effect of defeating a predetermined boss is executed as an effect corresponding to a specific big hit in the probabilistic time-shortening game state, and when the battle effect is executed, the story effect progresses, except for the exception. , In a specific gaming state, the story may progress only when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected and a specific effect pattern is selected. For example, the effect pattern "Battle Reach" corresponding to the hit corresponds to the battle effect of defeating a predetermined boss, but the effect content executed when the latter half variation pattern is "16H" and the latter half variation pattern are "1AH". The content of the effect executed in the case of "" is the same. Therefore, when the battle effect corresponding to the above-mentioned "battle reach" is executed, regardless of whether the game is in the probabilistic and time-saving game state ("high time") or in the probabilistic and non-time-saving game state ("hidden"), There is a possibility that it will progress as a story production. On the other hand, in the probabilistic and time-saving game state (“high time”), “19H” is selected as the latter half fluctuation pattern, and among the production patterns that can be executed according to the latter half fluctuation pattern, a specific effect different from the battle effect. Only when the production pattern is executed, there is a possibility that the story production will proceed. As such a specific production pattern, the large role straddling production described later corresponds. The period of "hidden" may be a so-called latent zone, which may be a latent production section (third production mode) different from the story production section (first production mode) and the battle production section (second production mode). , In addition to performing the same effect as the battle effect section as described above, a specific effect that is not executed in the battle effect section may be executed. Further, in order to show that the latent effect section is clearly different from the battle effect section, in the latent effect section, for example, a pair of left and right movable units 81A and 81B are brought close to each other so as to draw a circle in front of the display area 13a. Alternatively, the decorative symbols are variably displayed at the center of the circle formed by these movable units 81A and 81B, while in the battle effect section, the movable units 81A and 81B are decorated in the display area 13a in the normal state in the standby position. The symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the battle effect is executed in both the battle effect section and the latent effect section corresponding to "hidden", but the battle effect is not limited to this, and the battle effect is executed only in the battle effect section. You may do so.

As shown in FIG. 87, the large-feature straddle effect is an effect associated with the effect executed during the fluctuation of the hit, and is an effect of video display that can be executed even during the big hit. As shown in the figure, in the normal boss defeating effect (including the battle effect), the re-lottery effect is executed after the boss is defeated by the battle effect, and as a result, the start of the big hit is clearly indicated according to the big hit start interval. The big hit start video is displayed, and then the production according to the big hit is executed. The re-lottery effect means an effect that suggests the possibility of changing the number symbol (for example, 444) once displayed as a decorative symbol on the display screen to a different number symbol (for example, 777). On the other hand, in the big role straddle production, the re-lottery production, the big hit start video, and the big hit production are not displayed. An image that shows the situation after that) will be displayed. When the video related to such a big role straddle production is displayed, the player has the impression that the big hit has suddenly started. However, in reality, a notification display that encourages right-handed hits and a display effect of decorative symbols that have a uniform number pattern are performed, so the player can detect the start of a big hit by visually recognizing these displays. In the big role straddle production, it does not mean that the big hit is not displayed at all. It should be noted that during the execution of the large role straddling effect, the display effect of the decorative pattern in which the number patterns are aligned and the notification display prompting the right-handed stroke may not be displayed. In this case, it is possible to separately notify that the jackpot is a big hit by using an LED or a 7-segment display.

To explain again with reference to FIG. 70, in S294, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is exactly 100. When the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is 100, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is "final at high time" and moves to the process of S295. If the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is 101 or more instead of 100, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S296.

In S295, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of controlling the operation related to the ST final variation effect according to the “high time final”. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect control process during the probability change.

In S296, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit is 101 times or more and 123 times or less. When the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is 101 times or more and 123 times or less, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is "incubation" and proceeds to the process of S297. When the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is not 123 times or less but 124 times or more, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S298.

In S297, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of controlling the operation related to the latent probability effect according to the "latent". When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect control process during the probability change.

In S298, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is exactly 124. When the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is 124, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is "latent final" and proceeds to the process of S299. When the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit is 125 times or more instead of 124 times, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect control process during the probability change.

In S299, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of controlling the operation related to the effect of the final variation during latency according to the “final latency”. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect control process during the probability change. In this embodiment, the effect to be selected is controlled to be different according to the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the table and the special symbol referred to by the main CPU 71 are used. The effect may be changed according to the number of fluctuations. Further, since the main CPU 71 narrows down (selects) the fluctuation pattern, the sub CPU 201 selects the production pattern and the production content according to the fluctuation pattern without determining the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit. May be good. In particular, the ST final variation effect and the latent final variation effect are selected based on one effect pattern corresponding to when the variation pattern hits or misses, so that the sub CPU 201 changes after the big hit ends. It is possible to execute the effect without recognizing the number of times, but the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit and the specific variation pattern corresponding to the ST final variation effect or the latent final variation effect are received. An error determination may be made by determining whether or not it is normally the correct timing to receive such a specific fluctuation pattern based on the timing of the operation. According to such an error determination, the sub CPU 201 can recognize an abnormality that a specific fluctuation pattern is not transmitted at a specific timing.

[Story & battle production selection process]
FIG. 71 shows a story & battle effect selection process by the sub CPU 201. The story & battle effect selection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned probability change effect control process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the story production is already being executed (S301). If the story production is already being executed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S306. If the story production is not being executed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S302.

In S302, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the state has shifted from the normal gaming state (non-probability changing gaming state) to the probabilistic gaming state through a big hit. That is, it is determined whether it is a so-called first hit V probability jackpot or a V probability jackpot in a consecutive villa. In the case of the transition from the normal gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state (in the case of the V probable big hit of the first hit), the sub CPU 201 shifts to the process of S303. When it is not in the state of shifting from the normal gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state (in the case of the V probable jackpot in the consecutive villa), the sub CPU 201 shifts to the process of S309.

In S303, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the first story effect.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the boss defeat flag to "0" (S304). The boss defeat flag indicates whether or not a predetermined boss has been defeated in the battle production, "1" indicates the defeat of the predetermined boss, and "0" indicates defeat. In addition to the failure to defeat a predetermined boss, the defeat also includes a confrontation with an enemy character other than the designated boss.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a stage related to the story effect and the battle effect (S305). That is, either a normal stage or a specific stage corresponding to the story production is selected. Each stage has a predetermined boss associated with it, and the story production progresses by defeating the predetermined boss corresponding to one stage. It is desirable that the order in which each story effect is executed is predetermined, but the order is not limited to this, and the story effect to be executed may be selected by lottery. In the present embodiment, the stage or boss corresponding to the story production is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the boss may be selected first and then the story production or stage corresponding to the boss may be selected. However, the other production element may be selected based on one of the production elements. In the present embodiment, the story production, the stage, and the boss to be defeated correspond to each other. For example, when the same stage exists for two different bosses, or two different stories. The same boss or stage may exist for the production.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting another effect to be simultaneously advanced during the execution of the story effect (S306). Other effects include a variable effect pattern of a number pattern, an effect pattern at the time of reach, an effect pattern related to so-called pre-reading notice, an effect pattern related to a pending change, and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to end the story production during the fluctuation (S307). The fluctuation means a fluctuation at the time of determining the number of fluctuations. When ending the story production during the fluctuation, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S308. If the story effect is not terminated during the fluctuation, the sub CPU 201 ends the story & battle effect selection process. Since the story production is controlled in units of time, it may be executed over a plurality of fluctuation times, and it is necessary to select the production to be executed during the fluctuation before the start of each fluctuation. Therefore, by performing the above determination during the fluctuation, even if the fluctuation display starts, it is possible to determine whether or not to end the story effect during the fluctuation display.

In S308, the sub CPU 201 finishes the story production during the fluctuation, and then performs a process of displaying the image of the battle preparation only during the fluctuation (S308). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the story & battle effect selection process. In addition, it is desirable that the symbol variation when the image during battle preparation is displayed is an out-of-order symbol variation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when displaying the image during battle preparation when the winning symbol variation is displayed, the symbol variation is not limited to this. It is also possible to display the battle preparation in progress and then display the effect indicating the hit.

In S309, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the boss defeat flag is "1". When the boss defeat flag is "1", the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S310. When the boss defeat flag is "0" instead of "1", the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S311. That is, if the story production is completed and the battle is being prepared, or if the battle production is executed in the previous probabilistic game state but the boss is not defeated, the sub CPU 201 is after a predetermined number of fluctuations have passed since the end of the jackpot. Immediately after the end of the big hit, the battle production will proceed as a battle production section.

In S310, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the story effect to be advanced next in order to advance the story effect according to the defeat of the boss. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S304.

In S311 the sub CPU 201 executes the battle effect selection process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the story & battle effect selection process.

[Battle production selection process]
FIG. 72 shows the battle effect selection process by the sub CPU 201. The battle effect selection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the story & battle effect selection process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a battle effect according to the stage (S321). However, since the stage is selected according to the story production, the stage is not changed if the story production does not progress. That is, in the present embodiment, the stage is not changed unless the boss to be defeated is changed, so even if the big hit is won, the stages before and after the big hit may be the same.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the latter half fluctuation pattern is "16H" or "1AH" (S322). That is, it is determined whether or not the battle effect of "Battle Reach" corresponding to the hit of "High time" or "Hidden" is selected. When the latter half fluctuation pattern is "16H" or "1AH", the sub CPU 201 determines that the battle effect of "Battle Reach" corresponding to the hit is selected, and proceeds to the process of S323. When the latter half fluctuation pattern is neither "16H" nor "1AH", the sub CPU 201 determines that a battle effect other than the "battle reach" corresponding to the hit has been selected, and proceeds to the process of S326.

In S323, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the battle effect of defeating the boss corresponding to the stage. That is, the sub CPU 201 executes a battle effect of defeating a predetermined boss by lottery using the effect pattern determination table for the normal stage shown in FIG. 44, or a battle of confronting an enemy character other than the predetermined boss. Decide whether to perform the production. When executing the battle effect of defeating the boss, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S324. When the battle effect of defeating the boss is not executed and the battle effect of confronting other enemy characters is executed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S325.

In S324, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the boss defeat flag to "1". When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the battle effect selection process.

In S325, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the boss defeat flag to "0". When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the battle effect selection process.

In S326, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the latter half fluctuation pattern is "19H". That is, it is determined whether or not the battle effect of "Resurrection after defeat of ST battle" corresponding to the hit is selected. When the latter half fluctuation pattern is "19H", the sub CPU 201 determines that the battle production of "Resurrection after defeat of ST battle" corresponding to the hit is selected, and proceeds to the process of S327. If the second half fluctuation pattern is not "19H", the sub CPU 201 has a battle effect other than "Resurrection after defeat of ST battle" and "Battle reach" corresponding to the hit, that is, a battle effect in which a defeat that cannot defeat a predetermined boss is confirmed. Is determined to have been selected, and the process proceeds to S330.

In S327, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a specific stage is selected as the current stage. When the specific stage is selected, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S328. When the specific stage is not selected and the normal stage is selected, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S323.

In S328, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute a large role straddle production instead of the battle production of "Resurrection after defeat of ST battle" by lottery using the production pattern determination table for the specific stage shown in FIG. .. When executing the large role straddling effect, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S329. When the battle effect of "Resurrection after defeat of ST battle" is executed without executing the large role straddle effect, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S323.

In S329, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the boss defeat flag to "1". When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the battle effect selection process. In the case of the battle production of "Resurrection after defeat of ST battle", "1" is set in the boss defeat flag in order to finally defeat the boss.

In S330, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the boss defeat flag to "0". When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the battle effect selection process.

[Interface notice setting process]
FIG. 73 shows the interface notice setting process by the sub CPU 201. The interface notice setting process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determination process of S205 described above, and is called to determine the content of the interface notice described later as the effect mode when the effect mode determination process is executed.

Here, the interface notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the interface notice is mainly included in the story production for displaying the content introduction (story introduction) of the story production and the text message for introducing the character in the display area 13a. be. For example, in the display area 13a, basically, the decorative symbol 1000 is displayed in a variable manner or stopped in the central portion, and the reserved image 1010 indicating the number of reserved start prizes is displayed in the lower left side, and the text message of the interface notice is displayed. , Displayed in the message display area 1020 at the bottom right. For example, in the message display area 1020, the story introduction content is displayed as a text message. In addition, an image such as a story effect is displayed in the remaining area 1030 including the background of the decorative pattern 1000.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 88 (b) and 88 (c), while the text message of the story introduction content is displayed in the message display area 1020 during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1000, the foreground of the message display area 1020 is displayed. As an effect accompanied by the moving image display, the shutter image 1040 is such that the shutter is gradually moved to cover the text message, and then the shutter is opened as shown in (d) and (e) of the figure. May be displayed. In such a case, there is a possibility that "chance production" will be performed as an interface notice. In the chance effect, when the shutter image 1040 is displayed in the closed state, the text message displayed in the message display area 1020 is gradually made invisible as shown in (b) and (c) of the figure. .. That is, when the shutter image 1040 is displayed, the text message is obscured even when the text message of the story introduction content is being displayed while the story production is being executed. After that, as shown in (d) and (e) of the figure, when the shutter image 1040 is displayed in the open state, the message display area 1020 is temporarily "chanced" (or "chance" (or) instead of the story introduction content. For example, a text message such as "Fever") is displayed. Such a chance production is a production that suggests the expectation of a big hit and the expectation (reliability) of a probability change rush, and whether or not it can be executed is determined according to the fluctuation pattern, and the chance production is executed. Then, the player has a high expectation for a big hit and a probability change. It should be noted that the chance effect can be executed regardless of whether or not the story effect related to the video display is being executed.

As shown as an example in FIG. 89A, the interface notice related to the story introduction may include a case without a shutter movable pattern and a case with a shutter movable pattern in which the shutter image 1040 appears. When there is no shutter movable pattern, text messages corresponding to the story introduction contents 1, 2, ... Are sequentially displayed in the message display area 1020 at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1000 is started. On the other hand, when there is a shutter movable pattern, similarly, text messages corresponding to the story introduction contents 1, 2, ... Are sequentially displayed in the message display area 1020 at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1000 is started. Even when the story introduction content is being displayed in the message display area 1020 during the variable display of the decorative symbol 1000, the shutter image 1040 appears due to the shutter movement, and the display of the story introduction content is temporarily interrupted. Then, when the shutter image 1040 disappears, a text message such as "chance" is temporarily displayed in the message display area 1020 instead of the story introduction content.

As shown in FIG. 89 (b), for the interface notice related to the story introduction, for example, 50 s is specified as the display time for each time, and the contents of the story introduction a plurality of times are specified for each set. For example, when the story introduction contents 1 to 5 of the set 1 are sequentially displayed five times as the number of executions at a predetermined display time, the set of the story introduction to be executed from the start of the next variable display is selected by lottery. The number of times the story introduction content can be executed is set in the subtraction counter, and is counted until the value of the subtraction counter becomes 0. Whether or not to execute the effect of the shutter movable pattern is determined by a lottery different from the set lottery for introducing the story, including the execution timing. When the shutter image 1040 appears due to the shutter movable pattern, after the shutter image 1040 does not appear, the story introduction contents in the next order from the start of the next variation display are displayed in the message display area 1020. In this case, the display time for each story introduction content will change. Although not shown in particular, the interface notice related to the character introduction is defined as, for example, 30 s as the display time, and it is decided by a lottery for each category whether or not to execute it sporadically at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol 1000 starts. It is supposed to be done.

Explaining again with reference to FIG. 73, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the interface notice by lottery (already executed) based on the fluctuation pattern from the main control circuit 70, the winning lottery result, and the like. (S341). When executing the interface notice or when it is already being executed, the sub CPU 201 shifts to the process of S342. If the interface notice is not executed during execution, the sub CPU 201 ends the interface notice setting process.

In S342, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the interface notice is related to the story introduction. In the case of the interface notice related to the story introduction, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S343. If it is not the interface notice related to the story introduction, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S352.

In S343, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times the story introduction can be executed is 0. When the number of executions is 0, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S344. When the number of executions is 1 or more instead of 0, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S350.

In S344, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of drawing a lottery for each set of story introduction contents to be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), when the set 1 is obtained as a lottery result, the story introduction contents 1 to 5 are determined.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting "5" in the subtraction counter as the number of times the story introduction can be executed (S345).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the story introduction content to be executed at the present time (S346). As a result, the selected story introduction content is displayed in the message display area 1020 according to the start of the variable display.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the display time (story introduction time) defined for one story introduction in the timer (S347).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the subtraction counter as the number of times the story can be introduced (S348).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the chance effect setting process (S349). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the interface notice setting process.

In S350, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the story introduction time has elapsed based on the value of the timer. When the story introduction time has elapsed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S346 and performs a process of selecting the story introduction content to be executed next. If the story introduction time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S351.

In S351, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the shutter movable flag is "1". The shutter movable flag is a flag indicating the presence or absence of the shutter movable pattern, and is set to "1" when the chance effect using the shutter movable pattern is executed. When the shutter movable flag is "1", the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S346 and performs a process of selecting the story introduction content accompanied by the shutter movable pattern. If the shutter movable flag is not "1", the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S349.

In S352, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the interface notice is related to the character introduction. In the case of the interface notice related to the character introduction, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S353. If it is not an interface notice related to character introduction, the process proceeds to S349.

In S353, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of drawing a lottery for the character introduction content to be executed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the character introduction content obtained as a lottery result (S354). As a result, the set character introduction content is sporadically displayed in the message display area 1020 according to the start of the variable display. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S349. That is, the interface notice related to the character introduction ends after a predetermined display time, or ends with the execution of the chance effect.

[Chance production setting process]
FIG. 74 shows the chance effect setting process by the sub CPU 201. The chance effect setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the interface notice setting process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the chance effect by lottery based on the fluctuation pattern from the main control circuit 70, the winning lottery result, and the like (S361). When executing the chance effect, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S362. When the chance effect is not executed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S366.

In S362, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the shutter movable flag to "1".

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the story effect related to the video display is being executed at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (S363). When the story production is being executed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S365. If the story production is not being executed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S364.

In S364, the sub CPU 201 selects the chance effect table (A pattern) shown in FIG. 42, and based on this table, an effect pattern capable of executing a moving image display in which the shutter image 1040 appears at a relatively late stage within the fluctuation time. (For example, normal variation effect B) is selected. As a result, when the story effect is not executed, the chance effect is executed at a relatively late timing after the decorative symbol starts the variable display so that the shutter image 1040 does not appear suddenly as much as possible. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the chance effect setting process.

In S365, the sub CPU 201 selects the chance effect table (B pattern) shown in FIG. 42, and based on this table, an effect pattern capable of executing a moving image display in which the shutter image 1040 appears at a relatively early stage within the fluctuation time. (For example, normal variation effect C) may be selected. As a result, when the interface notice of the story introduction is executed together with the story production, the chance production is executed so that the shutter image 1040 appears at a relatively early timing after the decorative design starts the variable display. There is. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the chance effect setting process.

In S366, since the sub CPU 201 does not cause the shutter image 1040 to appear without executing the chance effect, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the shutter movable flag to "0". When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the chance effect setting process.

[Pseudo-continuous production decision processing]
FIG. 75 shows a pseudo continuous effect determination process by the sub CPU 201. The pseudo-ream effect determination process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determination process of S205 described above, and is called to determine the pseudo-ream effect mode when the effect mode determination process is executed. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the normal pseudo-ream by lottery based on the first half fluctuation pattern (S371). When executing the normal pseudo-ream, the sub CPU 201 shifts to the process of S372. When the normal pseudo-ream is not executed, the sub CPU 201 shifts to the process of S374.

In S372, the sub CPU 201 normally executes the pseudo-continuous effect setting process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S373.

In S373, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a reach effect according to the latter half fluctuation pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the pseudo-continuous effect determination process.

In S374, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the high-speed pseudo-ream by lottery based on the first half fluctuation pattern. When executing the high-speed pseudo-ream, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S375. When the normal pseudo-ream is not executed, the sub CPU 201 shifts to the process of S376.

In S375, the sub CPU 201 executes the high-speed pseudo continuous effect setting process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S373.

In S376, the sub CPU 201 executes other effect setting processing other than the pseudo-ream. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the pseudo-continuous effect determination process.

[Normal pseudo-continuous production setting processing]
FIG. 76 shows a normal pseudo continuous effect setting process by the sub CPU 201. Normally, the pseudo-continuous effect setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect determination process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the number of pseudo-reams according to the first half fluctuation pattern (S381). In this case, as the number of pseudo-reams, the usual 1 to 4 times are selected. Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a normal pseudo-ream effect content according to the selected number of pseudo-reams (S382). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the normal pseudo-continuous effect setting process.

[High-speed pseudo continuous production setting processing]
FIG. 77 shows a high-speed pseudo continuous effect setting process by the sub CPU 201. The high-speed pseudo continuous effect setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect determination process described above.

Here, the promotion lottery performed to change the background color of the video during the pseudo-ream execution will be described with reference to FIG. 90, and the operation timing between the pseudo-ream and the related effect will be described with reference to FIG. 91. explain.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the present embodiment, a promotion lottery is performed in order to change the background color of the image during the pseudo-continuous execution, and the tables (1) to (5) are used as the basis in this promotion lottery. It is configured as follows. Tables (1) to (5) define a background color that changes next according to the background color staying at the present time and a random number range (not shown) as a lottery condition. The background color changes from "blue" → "green" → "red" → "gold" → "rainbow", suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is high. For example, if the background color to stay at the present time is "blue", the background color to be changed from "blue" to the next is determined by the promotion lottery by referring to the table (1), and the background color to stay at the present time is "green". In the case of ", the background color that changes next from" green "is determined by the promotion lottery by referring to the table (2), and each time the background color change is determined, the higher table is used step by step. In each of the tables (1) to (5), the random number range is defined so that the lottery probability becomes smaller toward the right side of the horizontal axis. Further, the background color has a different probability of changing to "rainbow", which has the highest expectation of big hit, depending on whether or not the fluctuation pattern at the time of high-speed pseudo continuous execution corresponds to the big hit. For example, in the case of a big hit, "rainbow" may be selected as the background color, but in the case of a miss, "rainbow" may not be selected in each table (1) to (5). The random number range of is specified. As a result, in the case of deviation, the first half fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 4" is not selected as the pseudo-ream.

As shown in FIG. 90 (b) as an example of the case of 20 times of pseudo-ream, the promotion lottery for whether or not to change the background color is executed in the reverse order from the final background color (final color). .. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the final color is "rainbow" and, for example, "to gold" as the background color change is obtained as a result of the promotion lottery, the stage immediately before that stage is reached. The background of the stay is "gold". Similarly, if "to red" is obtained as a result of the promotion lottery when the background of stay is "gold", for example, the background color changes, the background of stay in the stage immediately before that stage becomes "red", and the stay is further. If, for example, "to blue" is obtained as a result of the promotion lottery when the background is "red", the background of stay in the stage immediately before that stage is "blue". Then, the background color to be displayed first from the final color is sequentially determined by the promotion lottery. In the case of the high-speed pseudo-ream, the background color change may occur at least when the re-variation of 3.5 s is relatively short, but the background color may not change when the re-variation of 7 s is relatively long. The background color may change.

In this way, the promotion lottery for changing the background color is performed so as to be sequentially determined from the final color. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), the table obtained by converting the tables (1) to (5) is actually used. Is to be referred to. In the table shown in FIG. 90 (c), it is specified that the selection probability decreases as the color changes from "no change" to the lower row. In such a promotion lottery, the winning probability may increase as the number of pseudo-reams increases. Further, a color that is easily changed may be provided by changing the winning probability according to the stage of the pseudo-ream or the stage and the number of pseudo-reams. As for the background color change pattern, for example, when changing from "red" to "rainbow", the expectation of a big hit is higher than when changing from "gold" to "rainbow". Therefore, in the case of a big hit, In the promotion lottery, for example, when staying in the rainbow background, the probability that "to red" or the like is more likely to be selected than "to gold" may be specified. In addition, as described above, in the promotion lottery, the production is decided in the reverse order from the final color. Therefore, for example, if the promotion lottery "to gold" is won, it is called "gold → rainbow" in the table (4). It is synonymous with the selection of production. At this time, since the lottery method of the production is in the reverse order, winning the lottery "to gold" from the final color can be expressed as winning the demotion lottery, and if the demotion lottery is won. Can also be expressed as the production content is set as a result of performing a promotion lottery in the corresponding production. Also, since the final color is determined in reverse order, the first color of the production differs depending on the promotion lottery (or demotion lottery) of the production, and even if the final color is the same, for example, the color at the start of the high-speed pseudo-ream is randomly determined. The range of production is widened and rich in variety, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

As shown in FIG. 91, as the pseudo-ream, a high-speed pseudo-ream, a normal pseudo-ream, and a post-reach pseudo-ream (special pseudo-ream) are provided. The high-speed pseudo-ream is a pseudo-ream in which the variable display and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are repeatedly performed more times than the normal pseudo-ream. It has become. The normal pseudo-ream is a pseudo-ream in which the variation display and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are repeatedly performed 1 to 4 times, and is started immediately after the start of the variation display, and is connected to the super reach through the normal reach. The post-reach pseudo-ream is a pseudo-ream that is executed at a different timing from the high-speed pseudo-ream and the normal pseudo-ream. It has become like.

As shown as an example in FIG. 91, the execution time of the high-speed pseudo-ream is not limited to the time defined in the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation time), and may be continued for the first half fluctuation time or more. After the end of the high-speed pseudo-ream, it will develop into normal reach and super reach. ing. As a result, it is possible to standardize the effects related to the variation of decorative symbols such as normal reach and super reach executed after the end of each pseudo-ream, such as normal pseudo-ream, high-speed pseudo-ream, and pseudo-reach after reach, and the sub-control circuit 200. It is possible to reduce the load related to the display processing of.

To explain again with reference to FIG. 77, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the number of pseudo-seriess by lottery (S391). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines, for example, eight high-speed pseudo-series (A) or (B) when eight times are selected as the number of high-speed pseudo-series. As shown in FIG. 45, in the high-speed pseudo-ream 8 times (A), it is stipulated that the pseudo-ream of 3.5 seconds is performed 8 times (including the time to reach mode), and the high-speed pseudo-ream 8 times. In (B), it is stipulated that the 3.5-second pseudo-ream is performed 6 times (including the time to reach mode) and the 7-second pseudo-ream is performed twice. Here, the effect related to the pseudo-ream of 3.5 seconds (development) is to display the "reach eyes" after the fluctuation of 3.5 seconds. In addition, when the pseudo-ream is set to 8 times, since the reach mode is also taken into consideration, it can be said that the number of temporary stops as the pseudo-ream is 7 times except for the reach mode, but the temporary stop is 8 times as the pseudo-ream. And then display the reach mode. In this case, as an effect related to the pseudo-ream of 3.5 seconds (development), after the decorative pattern fluctuates for 3.5 seconds, a temporary stop of "bare eyes" is performed, and then the fluctuation display is performed again, and "reach eyes". "Is considered to be displayed. It is also possible to select the number of pseudo-runs that can be executed within the time required for SP reach (super reach) from one fluctuation time, but in this embodiment, 3.5 seconds and 7 seconds. Is specified in advance how many times to appear (see FIG. 45). Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in order to prevent the 7-second high-speed pseudo-ream from being continuous, the 7-second pseudo-ream is executed after executing 3.5 seconds twice or more in succession. The high-speed pseudo-ream of 7 seconds may be continuously executed without limitation.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a color (final background color) to be finally displayed as the background color (S392). That is, in this process, the final background color is determined in advance prior to performing the promotion lottery for changing the background color using the tables (1) to (5) of FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the background color change of each scenario based on the final background color by a promotion lottery using the tables (1) to (5) of FIG. 91 (S393). This process is performed to change the background color only when the high-speed pseudo-ream is 3.5 seconds.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a temporary stop pattern of the decorative symbol at the time of pseudo-continuous execution (S394).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped during the pseudo-continuous execution (S395).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the swing fluctuation time according to the time until reach development (S396). The sway fluctuation time is basically desirable to be shorter than the shortest time of 3.5 seconds for the high-speed pseudo-ream, but is not particularly limited in this embodiment. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the high-speed pseudo continuous effect setting process. By using the above method, it is possible to provide variations in the pseudo-ream effect mode in the variable time by combining the pseudo-ream effect of 3.5 seconds and 7 seconds. In particular, in the 7-second pseudo-ream effect, after performing the reach effect and the pseudo-ream effect with the reach effect (actually, the reach effect is shown once and then the pseudo-ream is continued). It is possible to execute an effect that displays a temporary stop, and in the case of a 3.5-second pseudo-continuous effect, there is a possibility that the color will change, and the roles will differ depending on the time of each pseudo-continuous effect. By doing so, the effect of the production can be enhanced. Further, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous effect of 7 seconds is performed, it becomes difficult to know whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect is continued after that, and the reach effect is executed by the pseudo-continuous effect of 3.5 seconds. In that case, since there is no possibility that it is a pseudo-continuous production accompanied by a reach production, the reach (reach production) is confirmed and the development or transition to the production such as normal reach or super reach is confirmed.

[V effect setting process]
FIG. 78 shows the V effect setting process by the sub CPU 201. The V effect setting process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determination process of S205 described above, and is called to determine the effect mode related to the V prize when executing the effect mode determination process.

Here, the effect related to the V prize will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93.

As shown in FIG. 92, the production related to the V winning is a series from the winning of the small hit or the big hit opened by the second big winning opening (V attacker) 54 to the failure of the V winning or the success of the V winning (big winning). It is a production of. As shown in the figure, after the timing 1 of the small hit winning or the big hit winning, the corresponding effect is executed at the timing 2 when the V attacker (second big winning opening 54) first opens. At this time, it is internally recognized by the sub CPU 201 that it corresponds to the 1st round of the small hit or the big hit, but the effect content at the timing 2 is the same.

Next, after the timing 3 at which the V attacker can win a prize is reached, the V tongue (displacement member 39) is in a position where the V tongue (displacement member 39) cannot win at the timing 4 at the time of a small hit, while at the same timing 4 at the time of a big hit. Is in a position where V tongue can win V. After that, at the timing 5 at the time of a small hit, the V prize will fail, while at the timing 5 at the time of a big hit, the V prize will be generally successful. As a result, at the timing 6 at the time of the small hit, the effect indicating that the V prize has failed is executed, while at the timing 6 at the time of the big hit, the large role effect is executed. The big role production is a production that indicates the start of a big hit.

The pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is a so-called V-probability ST machine, and if a V prize is won during a big hit, the gaming state after the end of the big hit becomes a probabilistic gaming state. It is possible to win a V prize, and by winning a V prize, a big hit will start. In this way, the V-certain ST machine and the 1st and 2nd type mixer are designed to realize different playability. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the timing of occurrence of the opening mode and the effect mode of the V attacker (second big winning opening) is adjusted, and the effect indicating the start of the big hit corresponding to the big hit winning at the time of V winning is performed. , Although it is a V-certain ST machine, it realizes a production that makes it look as if it is a 1st and 2nd type mixer.

FIG. 93 shows an operation pattern related to V winning at the time of a big hit and a small hit. T1 to T6 correspond to the timings 1 to 6 described above. As shown in the figure, at the time of a big hit, when the first V attacker (second big winning opening 54) is opened in the first round, the V tongue (displacement member 39) is also opened at the same time, but the opening time is, for example, 0. Since it is an extremely short time such as .1s, it is difficult to win a V prize at this time. After that, when the second V attacker is opened in the first round, the V tongue is opened for a T4 time, which is relatively longer than the previous opening time, so that the V winning is generally successful at this time. After that, a big role effect is executed at the time of T6 corresponding to the interval between rounds.

On the other hand, even at the time of a small hit, when the first V attacker (second big winning opening 54) is opened, the V tongue (displacement member 39) is also opened at the same time, but the opening time is an extremely short time such as 0.1 s. Therefore, it is difficult to win a V prize at this time. After that, as an opening pattern at the time of a small hit, when the V attacker is opened for the second time, the V tongue is closed, and after the V attacker is closed, the V tongue is opened for the time of T4. As a result, it is difficult to win a V-attacker in the T4 time at the time of a small hit, so that the V-winning fails at this time. After that, the effect of V winning failure is executed for the time of T6 corresponding to the interval between rounds at the time of big hit.

At the timing of T5, the effect related to the success of the V prize is executed when the game ball actually passes through the specific area 38A, but the effect related to the failure of the V prize is set so that the V prize can be won at the time of a big hit. It will be executed immediately after the time of T4 has elapsed. In the time of T6, a big role production indicating the start of a big hit or a production such as a V winning failure is executed, but the big role production may be continued after the second round at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, it is difficult to win a V during the small hit, and at the end of the small hit, there is no transition to a more advantageous gaming state than the gaming state before the small hit is won. Also, at the time of a big hit, the V attacker will be open in the second round following the first round, but in the case of a small hit, there is no concept of a round, and it will be open only for 1.8 seconds throughout. In this embodiment, the small hit ends when the V attacker closes after the second opening. In the present embodiment, although the possibility of V winning is not 0 at the time of a small hit, the game state does not change even if V winning is achieved. Further, in the present embodiment, there are cases where V winning is easy and V winning is difficult at the time of a big hit, and V attacker (second big winning opening 54) and V tongue so that V winning is difficult at the time of a small hit. Although the opening pattern of (displacement member 39) is defined, it is difficult to win a V in both the first round at the time of a big hit and the first opening at the time of a small hit. It should be noted that the V winning may be controlled so that the V winning is easy only at the time of a big hit and the V winning is difficult only at the time of a small hit. By controlling in this way, when the big hit time when it is difficult to win the V prize is controlled, there is no situation where the second round is produced even though the V prize is not won, so it is surely 1.2. It can be made to look like a seed mixer. This is because in the case of a 1st and 2nd class mixer, the subsequent opening is performed only when the V prize is won during the small hit, so if the attacker continues to open even though the V prize is not won, it is a big hit. This is because it is notified that there is, but according to this, it is possible to make the player recognize (a feeling of being rescued) that there is an opportunity to get a ball even if the V prize fails. can.

Explaining again with reference to FIG. 78, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit (S401). In the case of a big hit or a small hit, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S402. If it is not a big hit or a small hit, the sub CPU 201 ends the V effect setting process.

In S402, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to start opening the V attacker (second big winning opening 54). When the V-attacker is started to be released, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S403. If the V-attacker is not started to be released, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S404.

In S403, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting an effect related to opening the V attacker.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit (S404). If it is a big hit, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S405. If it is a small hit instead of a big hit, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S412.

In S405, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the V winning is successful. If the V winning is successful, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S406. If the V prize fails, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S412.

In S406, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a V winning effect. In the present embodiment, as the V winning effect, the effect of winning a big hit is executed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 again determines whether or not it is a big hit (S407). If it is a big hit, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S408. If it is a small hit instead of a big hit, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S411.

In S408, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the V winning is successful again. If the V winning is successful, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S409. If the V winning is unsuccessful, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S410.

In S409, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a jackpot start effect when the V winning is successful. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the V effect setting process.

In S410, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a jackpot start effect when the V prize fails. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the V effect setting process.

In S411, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a big hit acquisition failure effect as a small hit end effect. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the V effect setting process.

In S412, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the period during which the V prize can be won has ended. When the period in which the V prize can be won ends, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S413. If it is not the end of the period in which the V prize can be won, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S413. In addition, in the case of a small hit, since the effect display of V winning failure is always displayed, it is not determined whether or not the V winning has been won, but it is not limited to this, and in the case of a small hit. It may be determined whether or not a V prize has been won, and if a V prize has been won, it may be notified that it is a small hit. By controlling in this way, it is possible to clearly notify the player who recognizes that the machine is a type 1 or 2 mixer.

In S413, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the V winning failure effect. In the present embodiment, as the V prize failure effect, a big hit non-winning effect is executed. In addition, as an effect when the V prize is won, an effect suggesting that the transition to the probabilistic change is performed, for example, an effect such as performing a V display is performed, and as an effect when the V prize fails, the effect suggesting that the transition to the probabilistic change is not performed. For example, the V display may not be performed, or the character may lose the game.

[Button press effect setting process]
FIG. 79 shows the button pressing effect setting process by the sub CPU 201. The button pressing effect setting process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determining process of S205 described above, and is called to determine the mode of the button pressing effect when the effect mode determining process is executed.

Here, the button pressing effect will be described with reference to FIG. 94.

As shown in FIG. 94, the button pressing effect is an effect of displaying a button image 2000 imitating the effect button 23 in the display area 13a, and is performed to encourage the player to press the effect button 23 or repeatedly hit the effect button 23. There are cases (when displaying a normal button) and cases where a character 2010 appears together with the button image 2000 to produce an effect on the image (when displaying a character button). When displaying the normal button, the button image 2000 related to the normal button appears at the timing of button IN, and then when the player presses the effect button 23 within the button pressing valid period, for example, in the case of a big hit or a miss. A display related to the pressing effect is performed to indicate the effect. During the button press valid period, although not shown in particular, an effect that the button image 2000 is pressed each time the player presses the effect button 23, a meter for displaying a countdown of the button press effective time, and the like are displayed. NS.

On the other hand, even when the character button is displayed, the button image 2000 related to the normal button appears at the timing of button IN, as in the case of displaying the normal button. After that, the character 2010 appears together with the button image 2000 on the video, and the effect display of the action such that the character 2010 presses the button image 2000 is executed. After that, even if the player does not actually press the effect button 23, a display related to the effect of pressing is automatically performed, for example, in the case of a big hit or a miss. That is, in the case of displaying the normal button and the case of displaying the character button, the effect mode displayed at the timing of the button IN (appearance of the button image 2000) and the effect mode displayed at the timing of the final pressing effect. (Display of big hit and miss) is the same. In addition, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the character button is displayed than when the normal button is displayed.

Explaining again with reference to FIG. 79, the sub CPU 201 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the effect related to the repeated button presses (S421). When executing the effect related to the repeated button presses, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S422. When the effect related to the repeated button presses is not executed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S423.

In S422, the sub CPU 201 executes the button repeated hitting effect setting process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the button press effect setting process.

In S423, the sub CPU 201 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the pressing effect related to the character button. When executing the pressing effect related to the character button, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S423. When the pressing effect related to the character button is not executed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S425.

In S424, the sub CPU 201 executes the character button effect setting process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the button press effect setting process.

In S425, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect that encourages the pressing of other buttons. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the button press effect setting process.

[Button repeated hitting effect setting processing]
FIG. 80 shows the button repeated hitting effect setting process by the sub CPU 201. The button repeated hitting effect setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the button pressing effect setting process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the button repeated hitting effect flag is "1" as a result of drawing the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the game state, the winning lottery result, and the like. The button repeated hitting effect flag is a flag that is set as "1" until the button operation valid time elapses when the button repeated hitting effect is obtained as a lottery result. When the button repeated hitting effect is obtained as a lottery result, the button repeated hitting effect flag is set to "0" as an initial value. When the value of the button repeated hitting effect flag is "1", the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S434. If the value of the button repeated hitting effect flag is not "1", the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S432.

In S432, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting any of the scenarios 1 to 8 shown in the button repeated hit rank-up scenario table of FIG. 46.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting "1" to the button repeated hitting effect flag (S433).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect button 23 has been pressed (S434). When the effect button 23 is pressed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S435. If the effect button 23 is not pressed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S440.

In S435, the sub CPU 201 refers to the rank-up threshold value from the button repeated hit rank-up scenario table of FIG. 46 based on the button operation effective time and the scenario.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the level difference between the level according to the cumulative value of the given points at the present time and the rank-up threshold is 2 or more. When the level difference between the current level and the rank-up threshold is 2 or more, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S437. If the level difference between the current level and the rank-up threshold value is not 2 or more, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S441.

In S437, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the probability of the rank-up lottery pattern to "high probability". As a result, in the next rank-up lottery process, the possibility that points will be given each time the effect button 23 is pressed repeatedly within the operation effective time is relatively high, and the cumulative point value is likely to increase.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery related to rank up (S438). In the lottery related to this rank-up, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to give points based on the probability of the rank-up lottery pattern set in S437 or S441 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of displaying a predetermined icon image when the level corresponding to the current accumulated point value reaches LV4 (S439). When the icon image is displayed, the lottery related to the rank up may not be performed even if the effect button 23 is pressed after that.

Next, when the button operation valid period ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the button repeated hitting effect and sets the button repeated hitting effect flag to "0" (S440). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the button repeated press effect setting process. It should be noted that such a button repeated hitting effect setting process is controlled according to the scenario set together with the button repeated hitting effect flag, but even if the lottery related to the rank up of S438 is performed only within the button operation valid time. good.

In S441, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the probability of the rank-up lottery pattern determined according to the scenario. For example, if the level difference between the current level and the rank-up threshold value is not 2 or more and the rank-up lottery pattern does not correspond to "success" or "no" by referring to the button repeated hit rank-up scenario table in FIG. The probability of the rank-up lottery pattern is set to "low probability". When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S348. In the present embodiment, points are increased when the rank-up lottery is won, but the points are not limited to this, and the level may be directly raised when the rank-up lottery is won.

[Character button production setting process]
FIG. 81 shows the character button effect setting process by the sub CPU 201. The character button effect setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the button press effect setting process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a button to appear (S451). In this process, the sub CPU 201 changes the color of the button image 2000 according to, for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a character to appear (S452). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the type of character 2010 to appear with the button image 2000, for example, according to the expected degree of jackpot.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting an action in which the character presses a button (S453). In this process, the sub CPU 201 changes the action of the character 2010 pressing the button image 2000 according to, for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the final pressing effect (S454). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines, for example, the content of the effect display to be executed after the display of the action in which the character 2010 presses the button image 2000 according to the expectation of the big hit.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of invalidating the operation of the effect button 23 (S455). As a result, even if the effect button 23 is pressed while the effect of the character button is being displayed and the button image 2000 is displayed, no effect is executed as a trigger.

Even during the effect display of the character button, a predetermined effect may be executed according to the pressing operation of the effect button 23. The color of the button image 2000 may be, for example, usually white, red when the expectation of the big hit is higher than usual, and rainbow color when the big hit is confirmed. As the selection of the character, for example, the character A may be normally selected, the character B may be selected when the expectation of the big hit becomes higher than usual, and the character C may be selected when the big hit is confirmed. As an action selection, for example, an action in which the character 2010 usually jumps and presses the button image 2000 is selected, and when the expectation of a big hit becomes higher than usual, the character 2010 presses the button image 2000 with both hands. When the action is selected and the big hit is confirmed, the action such that the character 2010 presses the button image 2000 while lying down may be selected. In addition, a unique action may be associated with each character type. In this case, the character and the action are a one-to-one combination, and the expectation of the jackpot is determined only by selecting the character type. However, when the character and the action are combined in various ways, the jackpot is determined according to the combination. It may suggest the degree of expectation. As for the selection of the pressing effect, for example, if it is out of the way, the losing effect is normally selected, and if it is a big hit, the effect of confirming the big hit is selected. The production of the content to be performed may be selected. Further, the pressing effect is not limited to the degree of expectation of a big hit, and may indicate a game state, or may notify some privilege (giving points) or the like. The expectation of the jackpot may be higher in the case of the display effect related to the character button than in the case of the display effect related to the normal button.

[Safe mode setting process]
FIG. 82 shows the safe mode setting process by the sub CPU 201. The safe mode setting process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determination process of S205 described above, and is called to set the LED brightness at the time of the effect operation when the effect mode determination process is executed.

Here, the safe mode regarding the LED brightness will be described with reference to FIG. 95.

As shown in FIG. 95, the sub CPU (host control circuit) 201 transmits a message designating the target LED and its brightness as the effect designation information to the LED control circuit 207, and the LED control circuit 207 receives the received message. The LED output signal is supplied to the LED 59 designated based on the above. The LED 59 is controlled to light up at a specified brightness. More specifically, a plurality of SPIs (Serial Peripheral Interface) 207A for serial communication are connected to the LED control circuit 207, and a plurality of devices 207B corresponding to the LED substrate or the LED drive circuit are connected to each of the SPI 207A. Is connected, and a plurality of LEDs 59 are connected to each of the devices 207B via the plurality of ports 207C. For example, in the LED control circuit 207, when SPI0, the device 15, and the port 15 are set as parameters at startup, the LED 59 indicated by an arrow is specified.

The sub CPU (host control circuit) 201 shifts to the safe mode based on the brightness value of the LED 59 set in the LED control circuit 207. The safe mode means, for example, when the brightness value of the LED 59 per minute is equal to or higher than a predetermined reference value, the brightness value of the LED 59 is reduced to a limited value (limited brightness value). The brightness value per frame (1 / 30s) of the LED 59 is, for example, 100% by multiplying the PWM value of 12 steps of the pulse width detail ratio and the DAC value of 64 steps of the current value by D / A conversion. Is "768", and 50% is "384". Assuming that, for example, a value at which the average brightness value for one minute is equivalent to 50% with respect to the brightness value per frame of the LED 59 is set as a predetermined reference value, the predetermined reference value is the brightness value 50 per frame. % × 1 minute (60s) = 384 × 1800 = 691200. After setting such a predetermined reference value, the sub CPU 201 measures the luminance value specified for the LED 59 for each frame, and accumulates the values obtained by measuring for 1 minute. When the cumulative value for one minute thus obtained exceeds the reference value of 691200, it is recognized that the reference value is exceeded and the mode shifts to the safe mode. In the safe mode, for example, a value obtained by multiplying the DAC value by 0.5 is set as the limiting luminance value, and the LED 59 is lit and controlled based on such a limiting luminance value. As a result, when the lighting frequency of the predetermined LED 59 becomes high and heat accumulation is likely to occur around the predetermined LED 59, the safe mode is set so that the brightness value is automatically lowered only for the predetermined LED 59. .. The safe mode is provided for the purpose of protecting LEDs that are particularly prone to heat accumulation, but is not limited to this, and may be provided only from the viewpoint of extending the life of LEDs that are frequently lit.

To explain again with reference to FIG. 82, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of calculating the brightness value set for the target LED per unit time (for example, 1 minute) (S461).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the brightness value per unit time calculated in S461 exceeds a preset reference value (S462). When the luminance value per unit time exceeds the reference value, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S463. If the luminance value per unit time does not exceed the reference value, the sub CPU 201 ends the safe mode setting process.

In S463, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the luminance value set after the reference value is exceeded as the limiting luminance value. As a result, the safe mode is set, and the LED 59 is lit and controlled within a range not exceeding the limited brightness value.

The limiting luminance value may be released when the following conditions are met. For example, the limited brightness value may be released on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed since the limit brightness value was set. In addition, the safe mode itself may be canceled by the brightness adjustment function on condition that the player or the clerk in the hall performs an artificial operation. Further, the limited brightness value may be released on condition that the contents of the work RAM 203 are cleared in response to a power failure or power on / off. In addition, the LED usage frequency (set number of times, etc.) per unit time is set as the safe mode release condition, and when the measured value satisfies the safe mode release condition after continuously measuring the usage frequency, the safe mode itself is set. You may cancel it. The safe mode release condition in this case is a case where the brightness value per unit time is, for example, 0.

[Special effect setting process]
FIG. 83 shows a special effect setting process by the sub CPU 201. The special effect setting process is a subroutine included in the effect mode determination process of S205 described above, and is called to set a special effect when the effect mode determination process is executed.

Here, the special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98.

First, as shown in FIGS. 96A to 96E, for example, in the fluctuation effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) accompanied by the normal reach mode, the initial motion, the high-speed fluctuation, the low-speed fluctuation, the reach mode display, the loss display, and the stop display are displayed. Is executed. As shown in FIG. 3A, in the initial movement, for example, the variable display is started in the order in which the decorative symbols 1000 are arranged, and a moving image in which the symbols flow in the vertical direction is displayed in the order in which the variable display is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), in the high-speed fluctuation and the low-speed fluctuation, a moving image in which all the decorative symbols 1000 flow in the vertical direction is displayed. During high-speed fluctuation, the symbol is displayed as if it fluctuates at a relatively high speed, suggesting to the player that the symbol does not stop for a while. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation, the symbol is displayed as if it fluctuates at a relatively low speed, suggesting to the player that the symbol will eventually stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), in the reach mode display, for example, the decorative symbols 1000 located on the left side and the right side are stopped and displayed with the same symbol type, and the central decorative symbol 1000 is continuously displayed in a variable manner due to low-speed fluctuation. NS.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (d), in the loss display, for example, the decorative symbol 1000 in the center is displayed with a symbol type different from the symbols on the left and right sides, so that the display mode of the loss is obtained. At this time, the decorative symbols 1000 on the center, left side, and right side are displayed so as to be slightly shaken, so that they are not in a completely stopped state, and are displayed in a variable manner in terms of production.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 96 (e), in the stop display, the variation display ends when the shaking of the decorative symbol 1000 is displayed so as to be contained, and all the decorative symbols 1000 are set to the predetermined symbol types. It is completely stopped and displayed in the confirmed state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 97A and 97B, in the story production section and the battle production section during ST, the production patterns are determined in the following order.

First, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the story production section during ST, when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the main (main control circuit 70), the fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the sub (sub control circuit 200). As a result, the sub CPU 201 determines the variation effect pattern (sub variation pattern) based on the variation pattern designation command (2).

Next, the sub CPU 201 specifies a stop display mode (combination of symbols) of the decorative symbol based on the variation effect pattern (3).

Next, the sub CPU 201 designates an effect pattern related to the advance notice based on the variable effect pattern (4). For example, the effect pattern specified here includes, for example, a reach pattern indicating a reach mode of a symbol.

Next, the sub CPU 201 specifies an operation pattern when the decorative symbol stops changing based on the variation effect pattern (5).

Next, the sub CPU 201 specifies an operation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol based on the variation effect pattern (6).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), in the battle effect section during ST, when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the main (main control circuit 70), the fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the sub (sub control circuit 200). As a result, for example, at the time of a hold prize, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery of the effect pattern related to the look-ahead effect based on the variable pattern designation command and the look-ahead effect table of FIG. 43 (1). In addition, the content of the fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the hold information.

Then, at the start of the change of the symbol based on the hold information, the sub CPU 201 determines the change effect pattern (sub change pattern) based on the change pattern designation command included in the hold information (2).

Next, the sub CPU 201 specifies a stop display mode (combination of symbols) of the decorative symbol based on the variation effect pattern (3).

Next, the sub CPU 201 designates an effect pattern related to the advance notice based on the variable effect pattern (4). For example, the effect pattern specified here includes, for example, a reach pattern indicating a reach mode of a symbol.

Next, the sub CPU 201 specifies an operation pattern when the decorative symbol stops changing based on the variation effect pattern (5).

Next, the sub CPU 201 specifies an operation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol based on the variation effect pattern (6).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), for example, when the battle effect is executed during ST, it is the same as the normal variation effect pattern from the initial motion to the reach mode display through the high-speed fluctuation and the low-speed fluctuation. After that, a battle effect such as a battle reach by video is executed together with a loss display of the design. Further, for example, during ST, although the pattern is the same as the normal fluctuation effect pattern from the initial motion to the high-speed variation, a special effect may be executed without displaying the reach mode thereafter. This special effect is, for example, an effect of operating a movable accessory during a high-speed fluctuation of a decorative symbol, or a sudden freeze of the decorative symbol during the fluctuation (for example, stopping in a changing mode or turning off the screen). It means a production that makes the decorative design invisible). Even when such a special effect is selected, high-speed fluctuation is performed because the designated display of stop as the reach mode of the decorative pattern during ST and the effect pattern (including the reach pattern) related to the notice are specified. When the special effect is executed after the end, it is necessary to control so that the display mode of the decorative symbol related to the reach pattern is not transmitted to the display control circuit 205. The special effect is executed after the high-speed fluctuation ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect may be executed from the middle of the high-speed fluctuation. Even in such a case, the production of high-speed fluctuation can be interrupted, and then a special production having no reach pattern can be smoothly executed.

By the way, the special effect is an effect executed during ST and in the battle effect section, and can occur only in a limited situation. Therefore, when the special effect is executed in the present embodiment, the reach pattern is an exception handling. Is not sent by. As a result, the lottery processing program for the sub CPU 201 to determine the effect pattern is not provided with a conditional branch that exclusively corresponds to the special effect, and is simplified as much as possible.

For example, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), in the fluctuation effect pattern related to the 10.0 second fluctuation, "variation start"-> "various notice first stage"-> "various notice second stage"-> "various notice three stages" The production contents are executed in the order of "eyes (fanning)" → "various notices 3rd stage (failure)", and finally "fluctuation stop" is performed in the form of loss.

In addition, in the fluctuation production pattern related to reach fluctuation, "variation start"-> "various notices 1st stage"-> "various notices 2nd stage"-> "various notices 3rd stage (fanning)"-> "various notices 3rd stage" The production contents are executed in the order of "success)", and after the "left and right tempai symbol stop (reach mode display)" is performed, a battle production such as "VS boss battle" is executed.

Then, in the variation effect pattern related to the special effect, "variation start"-> "various notices 1st stage"-> "various notices 2nd stage"-> "various notices 3rd stage (fanning)"-> "various notices 3rd stage" The production contents are executed in the order of "success)", and then the special production is executed. That is, the reach pattern selected at the same time as the content of the advance notice effect is not transmitted.

Explaining again with reference to FIG. 83, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the special effect based on the variation pattern designation command (S471). When executing the special effect, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S472. When the special effect is not executed, the sub CPU 201 ends the special effect setting process.

In S472, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting an effect pattern.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a symbol (S473).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the advance notice effect setting process (S474). This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a fluctuation stop pattern (S475).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting an operation pattern at the start of fluctuation (S476).

Next, the sub CPU 201 stops the transmission of the reach pattern (S477).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the content of the special effect (S478). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the special effect setting process.

[Notice effect setting process]
FIG. 84 shows the advance notice effect setting process by the sub CPU 201. The advance notice effect setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special effect setting process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the content of the advance notice effect (S481).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the advance notice effect is finally successful (S482). If the advance notice effect is finally successful, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S483. If the advance notice effect is not finally successful, for example, if it fails, the sub CPU 201 ends the advance notice effect setting process.

In S483, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of selecting a reach mode based on the reach pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the notice effect setting process.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, it may be as follows.

For example, as shown in FIG. 99, as the operation pattern related to the V prize at the time of a big hit, the same operation pattern as at the time of a small hit shown in FIG. 93 may be provided. For example, as shown in the figure, when the round pattern at the time of big hit is composed of 16 rounds as big hits A to D, in the big hit A, the operation in which it is difficult to win the V prize shown in FIG. 99 in the first round and the 11th round. The pattern is applied, and in the jackpot B, the motion pattern shown in FIG. 99, which is difficult to win V, is applied in the first round, and in the 11th round, the motion pattern shown in FIG. 93, which is easy to win V, is applied. The motion pattern shown in FIG. 93 for easy V winning is applied to the first round, and the motion pattern for difficult V winning shown in FIG. 99 is applied to the eleventh round. The operation pattern shown in FIG. 93, which makes it easy to win a prize, is applied to. According to such a round pattern at the time of big hit, the possibility of V winning differs depending on the type of big hit, and it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for a more advantageous type of big hit.

Further, even when an operation pattern that is difficult to win a V as shown in FIG. 99 is applied as an operation pattern at the time of a big hit, the process as shown in FIG. 100 may be performed as the V effect setting process. .. In FIG. 100, the processes of S401 to S407 and S411 to S413 are the same as those shown in FIG. 78. That is, as shown in FIG. 100, in the case of a big hit in S407, the sub CPU 201 may move to the process of S500 regardless of whether the V winning success or the V winning failure, and always select the same big hit start effect. good. On the other hand, in S407, if it is not a big hit, the sub CPU 201 moves to the process of S411 as in FIG. 78, and performs a process of selecting a big hit acquisition failure effect as the small hit end effect. According to this, it is possible to standardize the big hit start effect from the second round onward regardless of the result of the V winning, and it is possible to simplify the process related to the effect control only by distinguishing between the big hit and the small hit. ..

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, and can be applied to, for example, bullet gaming machines and enclosed gaming machines. Further, the general-purpose technology can be applied to various gaming machines such as a gaming machine, a slot machine, a pachislot gaming machine, and the like, in addition to the gaming machines mentioned above.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

(About Appendix A)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine is disclosed in which an effect that is easy to be executed differs depending on the effect mode that is being executed at that time (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

However, with the above technology, even if the execution frequency of the effect is changed according to the effect mode, it is easy to estimate the execution frequency of the effect from the effect mode grasped by the player, and the effect to be executed is achieved. There is a problem that it is limited and the interest in the production is reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately selecting a production so as not to reduce the interest in the production.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix A1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is predetermined. A main control means (for example, main CPU 71) capable of controlling a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to the special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) is provided. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls the effect according to the lottery result by the main control means, and
After the end of the special gaming state among a plurality of tables including a first table (for example, a low pre-table) and a second table (for example, a low table) to which information capable of specifying the fluctuation time of the identification information is associated. The table to be used is set in units of the number of times the predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, the number of fluctuations) that is satisfied after the end of the special game state. , Table for selecting fluctuation patterns according to game status)
As an effect controlled by the effect control means,
A first effect (for example, pseudo 1 to 4 premier) that can be executed when the lottery result is a lottery result controlled to the special gaming state, and
It is an effect different from the first effect and can be executed when the lottery result is a lottery result controlled to the special gaming state, and the possibility of being controlled to the special gaming state is the first. A second effect (for example, per pseudo to 4), which is lower than one effect, is provided.
When the lottery result is a lottery result controlled to the special gaming state and the main control means draws a lot based on the first table, the lottery is performed based on the second table, as compared with the case where the lottery is performed based on the second table. There is a high possibility that the effect control means controls the first effect.
When the main control means draws a lot based on the second table, the effect control means is more likely to control the second effect than the first effect.
The main control means switches the table based on the table switching information used and the number of times the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and specifies the fluctuation time of the identification information based on the table.
The effect control means is characterized in that the effect is controlled according to the fluctuation time of the identification information specified by the main control means.

In the above configuration, which table (low pre-table, low table) to be referred to when the start winning is established is defined according to the execution result of the jackpot game state, and according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. However, since the production itself is performed according to the fluctuation time, the table switching cannot be detected by the production. Therefore, for example, the player may perceive that the premier effect is selected at a low probability even though the premier effect is actually set to be selected with a high probability when the premier effect is executed. In this way, by making it impossible for the player to detect that the table is switched internally, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the premiere production.

(Appendix A2)
In this game machine,
The main control means includes a high-probability gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) in which the transition probability to the special gaming state is relatively high, and a low-probability gaming state (for example, a low-probability gaming state) in which the transition probability to the special gaming state is relatively low. For example, it is possible to control the non-probability change game state).
In the high-probability gaming state, the main control means controls the low-probability gaming state when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied a certain number of times (for example, 124 fluctuations).
In the used table switching information, tables other than the first table and the second table are defined up to the fixed number of times, and the first table or the second table is defined when the fixed number of times is exceeded. It is a feature.

In the above configuration, even if the game state after the end of the big hit changes according to the number of fluctuations, it is possible to control the production according to the game state. For example, even in the non-probability change game state, the table Since the tendency of the production can be changed by switching between, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the production including the premier production.

(Appendix A3)
In this game machine,
The used table switching information is further characterized in that the second table is specified so as to be selected when the initial power is turned on.

In the above configuration, since the control to the big hit game state is never performed when the power is initially turned on, the effect is controlled so as to be selected based on the low table. In this way, since it is possible to set a difference in the execution frequency of the premier effect depending on whether or not the jackpot game state is executed, it is possible to enhance the interest in the jackpot game state.

(Appendix A4)
In this game machine,
The used table switching information is further characterized in that the second table is defined when the number of times the predetermined start condition is satisfied exceeds the specific number of times the predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, the number of fluctuations is 700).

In the above configuration, the fluctuation effect table is switched from the execution of the jackpot game state to the specific number of fluctuations (700 times), and after the specific number of fluctuations is exceeded, the variation effect table (premier low probability) is displayed. Be selected. That is, by providing a period in which the premier production is likely to be selected before the specific number of fluctuations is exhausted, it is possible to enhance the interest in the number of fluctuations and the premier production.

(About Appendix B)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine is disclosed in which an effect that is easy to be executed differs depending on the effect mode that is being executed at that time (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

However, in a general gaming machine as described above, there is a problem that when the effects are superimposed, the visibility is hindered from each other and the player is prevented from grasping the contents of the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily grasp the effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix B1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), the identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is displayed. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode). 1) and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls the effect according to the lottery result, and
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) for displaying an effect controlled by the effect control means is provided.
As the effect controlled by the effect control means, at least a time effect controlled in time units (for example, a story effect) and at least a part of the display of the time effect can be superimposed and displayed. A timely effect (for example, a chance effect) that is controlled at any timing during one fluctuation of the identification information is provided.
When the time effect and the timely effect are executed when the time effect is not executed at the start of the change of the identification information, the effect control means executes the time effect at the start of the change of the identification information. It is characterized in that the time from the start of fluctuation of the identification information to the execution of the timely effect is kept longer than the case where the timely effect is sometimes executed.

In the above configuration, since the story effect is an effect controlled in units of time, the story effect may be executed over a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol.
On the other hand, regarding the chance production, when the story production is performed, at least a part of the display of the chance production can be superimposed on the display of the story production. Therefore, for example, the chance production is performed when the story production is executed. When executed, it is possible that the story production will be difficult to see.
Therefore, in the above configuration, when the variation of the decorative symbol at which the story production and the chance production start is the same, the chance production is executed more than when the story production is executed before the chance production. It is characterized by delaying the timing.
According to the above configuration, for example, when the story production is executed for the first time, the story production can be easily grasped by securing the time until the chance production is executed. Further, when the story production is executed before the chance production, it is considered that the story production has been completed to some extent, and the chance production can be executed earlier. By adjusting the timing at which the chance production is started in this way, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the story production.

(Appendix B2)
In this game machine,
The time production is composed of a series of a plurality of production contents (for example, story introduction contents by an interface notice) as one set.
The effect control means changes in one of the identification information.
When the production of one of the plurality of production contents is completed, the production of the next production content of the one production content is executed in the next variation of the one fluctuation.
When the timely effect is executed while the effect of one of the plurality of effect contents is being executed, in the next variation of the one variation, the next effect content of the one effect content It is characterized by performing a production.

In the above configuration, regarding the interface notice included in the story production, there is a chance when multiple story introduction contents are controlled by one set and one story introduction content is executed or one story introduction content is executed. When the production is executed, the story production is executed together with the next story introduction content in the next change of the decorative pattern. According to the above configuration, for example, when one story introduction content is finished before the chance production is executed, the interest in the story production can be enhanced as compared with the case where the story production is executed with a simple passage of time.

(About Appendix C)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine is disclosed in which an effect that is easy to be executed differs depending on the effect mode that is being executed at that time (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

However, in the above-mentioned technique, even if the execution frequency of the effect can be changed according to the effect mode, there is a problem that if the transition opportunity of the effect mode is monotonous, the interest in the effect is lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in production.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix C1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), the identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is displayed. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode). 1) and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU201) for controlling the effect according to the lottery result is provided.
As the effect controlled by the effect control means, a predetermined effect (for example, a story effect) controlled in units of time and composed of a plurality of stages of effect modes, and a specific effect mode (for example, a specific effect mode) controlled after the end of the special gaming state. Specific effects that can be performed in the battle effect section (for example, defeating the boss by the battle effect) are provided.
The effect control means
When the specific effect is executed during the specific effect mode and the special gaming state is controlled, the predetermined effect in the next stage from the stage of the predetermined effect executed after the end of the previous special gaming state. Perform the production,
When the execution of the predetermined effect is completed in one variation in the identification information, the identification information is counted a specific number of times (for example, 99 times of variation) from the time of the next variation and after the end of the special gaming state. ) Until it fluctuates, the effect is controlled as if it is the specific effect mode.
When the special game state is executed without executing the specific effect during the specific effect mode, the effect is controlled as being in the specific effect mode from the end of the special game state to the specific number of times. It is characterized in that it can be done.

In the above configuration, the story production is controlled in units of time, and the conditions for the story production to proceed to the next stage are that the boss is defeated by the battle production during the battle production section and the jackpot game state is controlled. .. In the battle production section, when the boss is defeated by the battle production and the jackpot game state is entered, it is performed after the story production after the jackpot game state ends, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is, for example, 99 times after the jackpot game state ends. Continue until you reach. Further, if the boss is not defeated by the battle effect during the battle effect section and the jackpot game state is reached, the battle effect section is set from the end of the jackpot game state until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches, for example, 99 times.
That is, the battle production section becomes shorter after the big hit when the boss is defeated by the battle production, and the battle production section becomes longer after the big hit when the boss is not defeated by the battle production.
Therefore, according to the above configuration, for example, for a player who wants to advance the stage of story production, if the stage of story production has not progressed, the stage of story production is higher than that of the case where the stage of story production has progressed. It is possible to provide an opportunity to proceed, that is, a battle production section for a long time, and to improve the interest in story production and battle production.

(Appendix C2)
In this game machine,
As the special gaming state, at least a first special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state in which V winning is difficult) and a second special gaming state (for example, V winning is easy) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state. (Big hit game state) and
When the specific effect is executed during the specific effect mode and the second special game state is controlled, the effect control means executes the predetermined effect after the end of the previous second special game state. It is characterized in that the predetermined effect is executed in the next stage from the stage of.

According to the above configuration, since the type of the jackpot game state that influences the V prize with respect to the progress of the production stage is also added as a condition, the interest regarding the progress of the production stage and the interest regarding the type of the jackpot game state can be enhanced.

(Appendix C3)
In this game machine,
As the specific effect, the effect control means can execute an effect related to an effect (for example, a large role straddle effect) executed during the latest fluctuation of the identification information during the special gaming state. It is a feature.

In the above configuration, it is possible to perform a big role straddling effect including defeating the boss by combining the time when the special symbol fluctuates and the time during the big hit. According to the above configuration, the player's interest in the production is enhanced by the production executed during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the battle production of defeating the boss executed during the jackpot, and the story production executed after the jackpot ends. Can be done.

(About Appendix D)
A gaming machine capable of transmitting the degree of expectation of a pseudo-continuous production to a player even during an interlocking production using an RTC (real-time clock) is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180295).

However, in the pseudo-continuous production as described above, the pseudo-identification information may be stopped (temporarily stopped) a plurality of times, and various effects may be linked after the pseudo-continuous production is further performed. If such a pseudo-continuous production is performed within a predetermined fluctuation time, there is a problem that time allocation becomes difficult and the types of production are limited.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of bringing variety to the production.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix D1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), the identification information (for example, a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is predetermined. With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to the special display mode (for example, the jackpot symbol display mode). There,
A re-variation control means (for example, sub CPU201) capable of executing a re-variation display (for example, pseudo-ream) for temporarily stopping the variation display of the identification information and then restarting the variation display during the fluctuation time of the identification information is provided. ,
As the time for executing the re-variation display, a first re-variation display time (for example, 3.5 s) and a second re-variation display time (for example, 7 s) longer than the first re-variation display time are defined. Being done
The re-variation control means performs a predetermined re-variation display (for example, high speed) by combining the first re-variation display time and the second re-variation display time in the fluctuation time of the identification information. Pseudo-ream) is performed, and even if the fluctuation time is the same due to the combination of the first re-variation display time and the second re-variation display time, the number of fluctuation displays executed in the fluctuation time It is characterized in that it is possible to make different.

In the above configuration, when a so-called pseudo-ream is executed, a relatively short first revariation display time of, for example, 3.5 s and a relatively long second revariation display time of, for example, 7 s are combined. It is possible to execute a high-speed pseudo-ream, and even if the fluctuation times are the same, it is possible to make the number of fluctuation displays executed in the fluctuation time different. Therefore, according to the above configuration, the types of effects related to the pseudo-ream are increased, and it is possible to bring diversity to the effects, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(Appendix D2)
In this game machine,
Further provided with an effect control means (for example, sub CPU201) that controls the effect according to the lottery result.
The re-variation control means responds to a third re-variation display time (for example, a time related to normal pseudo-continuous 1 to 4 times) that is different from both the first re-variation display time and the second re-variation display time. A specific revariation display (for example, a normal pseudo-ream) that executes the revariation display is performed.
As the effect controlled by the effect control means, at least after the predetermined revariation display is performed and after the specific revariation display is performed, a specific effect (for example, a specific effect) is executed. Production related to normal reach) is provided,
The effect control means is characterized in that the specific effect executed after the predetermined revariation display is performed and the specific effect executed after the specific revariation display is performed are executed at the same timing. And.

In the above configuration, the timing of executing the effect related to the normal reach after performing the high-speed pseudo-ream and the timing of executing the effect related to the normal reach after performing the normal pseudo-ream are the same (see FIG. 91). Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to standardize the production process related to the normal reach, and it is possible to execute the production with a simple process.

(Appendix D3)
In this game machine,
Further provided with an effect control means (for example, sub CPU201) that controls the effect according to the lottery result.
The re-variation control means has a re-variation display longer than the predetermined re-variation display, and has a third re-variation display time (for example, different from both the first re-variation display time and the second re-variation display time). , A specific revariation display (for example, a normal pseudo-ream) that executes the re-variation display according to (time related to 1 to 4 times of the normal pseudo-ream) is performed.
As the effect controlled by the effect control means, a specific effect (for example,, for example,) is executed at least after the predetermined revariation display is performed and after the specific revariation display is performed. An effect related to normal reach) and a special effect (for example, shaking variation) that is executed after the predetermined re-variation display is performed and before the specific effect is performed.
The effect control means includes the specific effect to be executed after the predetermined revariation display is performed, and the specific effect to be executed after the specific revariation display is performed and after the special effect. It is characterized by executing at the same timing.

In the above configuration, the timing of executing the effect related to the normal reach after performing the normal pseudo-ream and the timing of executing the effect related to the normal reach after performing the high-speed pseudo-ream and performing the shaking fluctuation are the same. Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to standardize the production process related to the normal reach, and it is possible to execute the production with a simple process.
Further, in the above configuration, since the normal pseudo-ream is longer than the high-speed pseudo-ream, it is possible to adjust the timing of executing the effect related to the normal reach, for example, by shaking fluctuation.

(About Appendix E)
A gaming machine that shifts to a probabilistic gaming state when a gaming ball enters a specific area during a jackpot is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-57840).

However, in the general technique as described above, whether or not the game medium passes through the specific area is an important effect, and when the player recognizes that the game medium has passed through the specific area, the player enters the probabilistic gaming state. Since it is possible to grasp the transition, there is a problem that the recognition of the gaming state is clear, but it is not possible to further produce the effect for the gaming state.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the production related to a specific area by using the production for the gaming state.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix E1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), the identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is displayed. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode). 1) and
With a movable member control means (for example, the main CPU 71) that controls the movable member (for example, the shutter 54a and the displacement member 39) in the opening mode in which the specific winning (for example, V winning) is easy and the opening mode in which the specific winning is difficult. ,
When the specific prize is won in the special gaming state, the high-probability gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 71) that controls the high-probability gaming state (for example, the probabilistic gaming state) after the end of the special gaming state,
A specific gaming state (for example, a small hit) that is different from the special gaming state and does not become a more advantageous gaming state than the gaming state immediately before the specific gaming state is executed after the end of the specific gaming state. Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 71) that controls the game state),
A production control means (for example, sub CPU201) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
When the specific prize is won during the special game state, the first effect of notifying that the special game state has been won (for example, the big hit start effect when the V prize is successful) and
When the specific prize is not won during the specific game state, a second effect (for example, a V prize failure effect) for notifying that the special game state has not been won, and
A common effect (for example, a V attacker opening effect) that is executed during the special gaming state and the specific gaming state and is executed before the first effect or the second effect is executed. When,
It is characterized by controlling.

In the above configuration, in the big hit game state, the shutter 54a and the displacement member 39 of the second big winning opening 54 are controlled in an opening mode in which V winning is easy, and in the small hit gaming state, the shutter 54a and the displacement member 39 are in an opening mode in which V winning is difficult. The notification that the jackpot was won by the jackpot start production when the V prize is successful is performed by the jackpot start production when the V prize is successful, and the V prize failure production is performed due to the V prize failure during the small hit. Notification of non-winning jackpot is performed. In addition, a common V attacker opening effect is executed before the jackpot start effect and the V prize failure effect when the V prize is successful are executed. According to the above configuration, in reality, for example, even though the game state after the small hit is controlled by the V prize, it can be made to appear as if the big hit was won by the V prize, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, it is possible to provide a novel playability.

(Appendix E2)
In this game machine,
The special gaming state is configured to include a plurality of rounds including the specific round (for example, 1R and 11R) in which the specific winning is possible.
The effect control means is characterized in that a common effect is executed in the rounds after the specific round regardless of whether or not the specific prize is won.

In the above configuration, if a V prize is not won even though it is a big hit, it is not notified that it is a big hit. It is possible to clarify that a big hit is being made by making the time common.

(Appendix E3)
In this game machine,
The movable member control means controls the movable member so that the open mode in the specific game state is shorter than the open mode in the special game state.
The effect control means is characterized in that even if the specific prize is won during the specific game state, the notification that the special game state has not been won is given.

In the above configuration, in the small hit game state, there is a possibility of giving an erroneous recognition by notifying that the big hit was not won at the time of V winning, but the big hit regardless of whether or not the V winning is won. This can be prevented by shortening the opening mode of the shutter 54a of the second winning opening 54 as compared with the case.

(About Appendix F)
A gaming machine capable of earning points by pressing a button during production is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-153805).

However, in the above-mentioned operation effect, since the player is requested to operate the operation means, the player who sees the operation request grasps that the effect proceeds from the operation means, and as a result, the operation is performed. Since the type of production after operating the means is also inferred, there is a problem that the result of the production is grasped from the type of production, and the interest in the production is lost.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in production.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix F1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), the identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is displayed. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode). 1) and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls the effect according to the lottery result, and
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) that displays a display related to the effect controlled by the effect control means, and
It is equipped with an operation means (for example, an effect button 23) capable of accepting an operation by a player.
As an effect controlled by the effect control means,
A first operation including a specific effect (for example, an effect in which the button image 2000 appears) in which a specific image (for example, a button image 2000) imitating the operation means is displayed, and an operation validity period of the operation means is provided. Production (for example, production when displaying a normal button) and
The operation validity period of the operation means includes the specific effect and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which the character 2010 appears) in which the displayed specific image is operated by a predetermined image (for example, character 2010). A second operation effect (for example, an effect when displaying a character button), which is not provided, is provided.
The effect control means
In the first operation effect, it is possible to control the effect performed following the first operation effect at the timing when the operation means is operated during the operation valid period after the specific effect.
The second operation effect is characterized in that it is possible to control an effect performed following the second operation effect at the timing when the predetermined image operates the displayed specific image.

In the above configuration, the button image 2000 is displayed and the operation valid period by the player is provided, and the first operation effect and the button image 2000 that subsequently execute the effect at the timing of the operation during the operation valid period are displayed. On the other hand, the operation validity period is not provided, and a second operation effect is provided in which a predetermined effect is executed such that the character 2010 operates the button image 2000. According to this, the player prepares to operate the effect button 23 when the button image 2000 is displayed by the first operation effect, but operates the effect button 23 in the case of the second operation effect. Since the predetermined effect is executed without any problem, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and improve the interest in the effect to be executed thereafter.

(Appendix F2)
In this game machine,
An effect that follows the first operation effect (for example, an effect that indicates that in the case of a big hit or miss) and an effect that follows the second operation effect (for example, in the case of a big hit or miss). A production that shows that fact) is a common production,
The second operation effect is characterized in that the expectation of shifting to the special gaming state is higher than that of the first operation effect.

In the above configuration, the effect performed following the first operation effect and the effect performed following the second operation effect are common to notify the winning result of whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and the second operation Since the production is more expected to shift to a big hit, the player can enhance the interest in the character 2010 in the second operation production.

(About Appendix G)
A gaming machine capable of earning points by repeatedly hitting a button during production is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-153805).

However, in the above-mentioned operation production, there is a problem that the player may be required to perform more operations than necessary, and as a result, the player loses interest in the production.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in the production and balancing the load on the operation of the player.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix G1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), the identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is displayed. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode). 1) and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls the effect according to the lottery result, and
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) that displays a display related to the effect controlled by the effect control means, and
It is equipped with an operation means (for example, an effect button 23) capable of accepting an operation by a player.
At least the operation valid period is defined as the effect controlled by the effect control means, and a specific lottery (for example, rank) for raising the rank in the effect according to the operation accepted by the player during the operation valid period is defined. (Up lottery) to raise the rank (for example, level) and when it reaches a specific rank (for example, LV4), a specific display is performed (an effect that displays an icon image suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is high). Is provided,
The effect control means controls the specific effect by dividing the operation valid period into a plurality of intervals.
A predetermined rank threshold value (for example, LV1 to LV1 to 4 as an upper limit level) is provided at each interval of the operation validity period.
The effect control means has a higher probability of raising the rank than the current probability when there is a predetermined rank difference (for example, a level difference of 2 or more) between the current rank and the rank threshold value at the current interval. It is characterized in that the specific lottery is performed with a probability.

When controlling the production by dividing the operation validity period by the player into multiple intervals, performing a rank-up lottery according to the operation by the player, and gradually raising the level, as the operation validity period approaches the end , The number of operations that can be performed by the player is limited in time, and as a result, the opportunity to rank up is gradually lost over time.
In such a case, if it becomes desperate to reach a specific level from the remaining time of the effective operation period, the player will not perform the operation, which may reduce the interest of the production.
However, if the level can be raised indefinitely during the operation valid period, the level will be raised quickly and the production will end, and it is conceivable that the operation valid period will be left over. If this happens, it is possible that the overall interest in the production will decline, so it is desirable to gradually raise the rank.
On the other hand, in the above configuration, the operation validity period is divided into a plurality of intervals, an upper limit level is set for each interval, and if there is a predetermined level difference between the upper limit level and the current level, the level when the player operates is set. It is controlled so that it is easy to win the rank-up lottery. Therefore, according to the above configuration, as long as the player performs the operation, the level is raised to some extent and the production progresses, so that it is difficult to lose the interest and it is possible to improve the interest in the result of the production.

(Appendix G2)
In this game machine,
When the change in the identification information is a change that does not result in the special gaming state, the effect control means is irrespective of the current rank when the player performs an operation after a specific period of the operation valid period. It is characterized by not raising the rank.

In the above configuration, when the fluctuation is not a big hit and the player operates it after a specific period, for example, by setting the probability of the rank-up lottery to "No", what level is the current level? It is possible to control so as not to raise the level so that there is no contradiction between the game result and the production.

(About Appendix H)
A gaming machine that controls an LED by using PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117600).

However, in the control of the LED (an example of the light emitting means) as described above, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is determined by setting the brightness value, but due to the influence of the structure of the gaming machine and the like, the light is frequently used. There is a problem that the temperature around the means becomes high, which affects the use of the light emitting means.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately using light emitting means.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix H1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), the identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is displayed. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode). 1) and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls the effect according to the lottery result, and
Light emitting means (for example, LEDs 59A to 59E, 59e to 59h) that emit light according to the effect controlled by the effect control means.
A setting means (for example, a sub CPU 201, an LED control circuit 207) capable of setting a luminance value for the light emitting means is provided.
The setting means accumulates the brightness values set in the light emitting means, and when it is determined that the accumulated value exceeds a predetermined reference value within a predetermined time, the brightness value set in the light emitting means is limited thereafter. It is characterized by doing.

In the above configuration, for example, when the average brightness value for one minute exceeds a predetermined reference value, the brightness values set for the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are limited, so that the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are cooled. The effect can be expected, and the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h can be used appropriately.

(Appendix H2)
In this game machine,
When the setting means limits the brightness value set in the light emitting means (for example, in the safe mode), the setting means determines that the accumulated value within a specific time is equal to or less than a specific reference value (for example, 0). If this is the case, the feature is that the brightness value set in the light emitting means is not limited thereafter.

In the above configuration, when the luminance value accumulated within a specific time is equal to or less than a specific reference value, for example, 0, it is determined that the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are cooled, and the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are set. Safe mode is canceled as a limitation of the set brightness value. According to the above configuration, the brightness values of the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h can be restored at an appropriate timing when the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h are cooled, so that the brightness values of the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h can be restored. Can be used more appropriately.

(About Appendix I)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine is disclosed in which an effect that is easy to be executed differs depending on the effect mode that is being executed at that time (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

In the above technique, when an attempt is made to execute an effect, the types of the effect increase, but in general, when the effect is executed, various effects are executed. However, by executing various effects, there is a problem that the control of the timing of transmitting the command related to the effect to the effect executing means becomes complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of simplifying control of transmission timing of complicated commands in production.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix I1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), the identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is displayed. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode). 1) and
A plurality of effect execution means (for example, display control circuit 205, voice control circuit 206, LED control circuit 207, drive control circuit 208) for executing the effect,
A transmission means (for example, a transmission means) capable of transmitting the command to each of the plurality of effect execution means based on a table (for example, a direct table) in which a timing for transmitting a command (for example, a message) related to the execution of the effect is specified. Sub CPU201) and
As the type of the table, at least a first table group in which one table is used in one effect and a second table group in which a plurality of tables can be used in one effect are provided.
In the table of the first table group (for example, the master table), it is possible to specify that the table of the second table group (for example, the slave table) is referred to.
When the command is stored in a predetermined area (for example, a direct buffer), the transmission means registers one table of the first table group corresponding to the command and refers to the one table. The table of the second table group is registered, and the command is transmitted based on the registered table.

In the above configuration, a message is transmitted when the message is stored in the direct buffer, and a master table and a slave table are provided in which the timing for transmitting the message is specified. In the master table, any table of the slave table is provided. It is possible to specify whether to refer to. Also, since the slave table can be referenced in the master table corresponding to the message when the message is stored in the direct buffer, whether to use the slave table depends on whether the message is stored in the direct buffer. Can be determined. Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to use the slave table based on the one master table used in one production simply by setting the message to be transmitted in the direct buffer. It is possible to simplify the control of the transmission timing of a complicated message in.

(Appendix I2)
In this game machine,
Further, as the type of the table, a third table group different from any of the first table group and the second table group is provided.
The transmission means
The table of the second table group is registered when referred to by the table of the first table group.
When a specific table of the first table group is registered and a predetermined table of the second table group referred to in the specific table is registered, when the specific table is destroyed, the predetermined table is registered. Discard the table
The table of the third table group (for example, a single table) is characterized in that it is registered and destroyed regardless of the registration and destruction of the table of the first table group.

In the above configuration, when the registration of the master table is destroyed, the referenced slave table is also destroyed, but the single table can be used regardless of the registration and destruction of the master table. For example, since it is possible to specify the transmission timing of a message commonly used in a plurality of effects in a single table, it is possible to more easily control the transmission timing of a complicated message in the effect.

(About Appendix J)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine is disclosed in which an effect that is easy to be executed differs depending on the effect mode that is being executed at that time (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

In the above technique, when an attempt is made to execute an effect, the types of the effect increase, but in general, when the effect is executed, various effects are executed. However, when various effects are executed, there is a problem that the control related to the effects becomes wasteful.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently performing control in production.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix J1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), and a plurality of identification information (for example, a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the plurality of identification information is changed. Is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to the predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode). Machine 1)
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls the effect according to the lottery result, and
An effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13, a display control circuit 205) for executing an effect,
A transmission means (for example, sub CPU201) capable of transmitting a command related to the effect to the effect execution unit is provided.
As an effect controlled by the effect control means, at least one of the plurality of identification information is displayed before the display result of the plurality of identification information is displayed after a predetermined effect (for example, initial motion, high-speed fluctuation, low-speed fluctuation). A first effect (for example, a battle effect during ST) in which a reach effect (for example, a reach mode display) in which one identification information is stopped is performed, and an effect that is executed less frequently than the first effect, and the effect is described after the predetermined effect. A second effect (for example, a special effect during ST) in which a special effect (for example, a special effect) is performed without executing a reach effect is provided.
In the control of the first effect and the second effect, the effect control means selects the effect mode of the predetermined effect and the effect mode of the reach effect.
In the second effect, the transmission means transmits a command related to the effect mode of the predetermined effect to the effect execution means, but does not transmit a command related to the effect mode of the reach effect to the effect execution means. And.

In the above configuration, for example, a battle effect during ST is provided as the first effect, and a special effect during ST is provided as a second effect that is executed less frequently than this. High-speed fluctuations are common. Here, in order to improve the efficiency of processing, the production mode of the initial motion and the high-speed fluctuation and the production mode of the reach production are selected in the second production in accordance with the first production having a high execution frequency. Is not transmitted to the display control circuit 205. In this way, by standardizing the processing related to the first effect having a high execution frequency and providing a process that does not use unnecessary processing results in the second effect having a low execution frequency, the processing related to the first effect having a high execution frequency can be obtained. Since the processing can be standardized without imposing a load, it is possible to efficiently perform control in the production.

(Appendix J2)
In this game machine,
The transmission means can transmit the command to each of the plurality of effect execution means based on the timing of transmitting the command related to the execution of the effect or a specified table (for example, a direct table).
As the type of the table, at least a first table group in which one table is used in one effect and a second table group in which a plurality of tables can be used in one effect are provided.
In the table of the first table group (for example, the master table), it is possible to specify that the table of the second table group (for example, the slave table) is referred to.
When the command is stored in a predetermined area (for example, a direct buffer), the transmission means registers one table of the first table group corresponding to the command and refers to the one table. The table of the second table group is registered, and the command is transmitted based on the registered table.

In the above configuration, a message is transmitted when the message is stored in the direct buffer, and a master table and a slave table are provided in which the timing for transmitting the message is specified. In the master table, any table of the slave table is provided. It is possible to specify whether to refer to. Also, since the slave table can be referenced in the master table corresponding to the message when the message is stored in the direct buffer, whether to use the slave table depends on whether the message is stored in the direct buffer. Can be determined. Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to use the slave table based on the one master table used in one production simply by setting the message to be transmitted in the direct buffer. It is possible to simplify the control of the transmission timing of a complicated message in.

(About Appendix K)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine is disclosed in which an effect that is easily executed differs depending on the effect mode that is being executed at that time (see JP-A-2012-143552).

However, in a general gaming machine as described above, there is a problem that when a plurality of effects are executed, the visibility of each other is hindered and the player is prevented from grasping the contents of the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a player can easily grasp the effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix K1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), the identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is displayed. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to a predetermined special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode). 1) and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls the effect according to the lottery result, and
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) that displays a display related to the effect controlled by the effect control means, and
As an effect controlled by the effect control means, at least a series of a plurality of effect contents (for example, story introduction contents by an interface notice) are configured as one set, and a first time effect controlled in units of time (for example, story introduction). (Direction), a second time effect (for example, a character introduction effect) that is configured as one effect and is controlled in units of time, and an effect that can be displayed by superimposing at least a part of the display of the first hour effect. , And at least a part of the display of the second time effect can be superimposed and displayed, and a timely effect controlled at any timing during the fluctuation of one of the identification information (for example, a chance effect). And are provided,
The effect control means changes in one of the identification information.
When the production of one of the plurality of production contents is executed in the first time production, when the production is executed for a predetermined time, or when the timely production is executed, the variation of the one In the next fluctuation, the production of the next production content of the above-mentioned one production content is executed,
When the second time effect is executed, when the second time effect is executed, or when the timely effect is executed, the second time effect is terminated.

In the above configuration, the story introduction effect is controlled as a set of a predetermined number of times, and the character introduction effect is controlled once. That is, the story introduction effect can display a series of related information, can display a relatively large amount of information, and the character introduction effect can display one time's worth of information. Therefore, it is possible to display something with less information than the story introduction effect. According to the above configuration, by executing the effect by combining the story introduction effect and the character introduction effect, it is possible to perform the effect according to the amount of information, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the effect.

(Appendix K2)
In this game machine,
When the first time effect and the timely effect are executed when the first time effect is not executed at the start of the change of the identification information, the effect control means has the first time at the start of the change of the identification information. It is characterized in that the time from the start of fluctuation of the identification information to the execution of the timely effect is kept longer than the case where the timely effect is executed when the effect is being executed.

In the above configuration, since the story introduction effect is an effect controlled in units of time, the story effect may be executed over a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol.
On the other hand, regarding the chance production, when the story introduction production is performed, at least a part of the display of the chance production is superimposed on the display of the story introduction production, so that, for example, when the story introduction production is executed. When the chance production is executed, it is possible that the story introduction production becomes difficult to see.
Therefore, in the above configuration, when the variation of the decorative pattern at which the story introduction effect and the chance effect start is the same, the chance effect is executed more than when the story introduction effect is executed before the chance effect. It is characterized by delaying the timing of being done.
According to the above configuration, for example, when the story introduction effect is executed for the first time, the time until the chance effect is executed can be secured, so that the story introduction effect can be easily grasped. Further, when the story introduction effect is executed before the chance effect, it is considered that the story introduction effect has been completed to some extent, and the chance effect can be executed earlier. By adjusting the timing of starting the chance production in this way, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the story introduction production.

(About Appendix L)
A gaming machine capable of transmitting the degree of expectation of a pseudo-continuous production to a player even during an interlocking production using an RTC (real-time clock) is disclosed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-180295).

However, in the pseudo-continuous production as described above, the pseudo-identification information may be stopped (temporarily stopped) a plurality of times, and various effects may be linked after the pseudo-continuous production is further performed. If such a pseudo-continuous production is performed within a predetermined fluctuation time, there is a problem that time allocation becomes difficult and the types of production are limited.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of bringing variety to the production.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix L1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), the identification information (for example, a decorative symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is predetermined. With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to the special display mode (for example, the jackpot symbol display mode). There,
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls the effect according to the lottery result, and
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 13) that displays a display related to the effect controlled by the effect control means, and
A re-variation control means (for example, sub CPU201) capable of executing a re-variation display (for example, a pseudo-ream) for temporarily stopping the variation display of the identification information and then restarting the variation display during the fluctuation time of the identification information. With
As an effect controlled by the effect control means, at least a predetermined effect (for example, an effect of changing the background color) in which the display mode (for example, the background color) of the effect can be changed according to the revariable display is provided.
The effect control means is a final display mode (for example, "rainbow") which is the final display of the predetermined effect displayed at the time of the final revariation display which is the revariation display which is finally executed in the fluctuation time. ) Is determined, and from the final revariation display to the revariation display that is first executed in the fluctuation time, the display mode of the predetermined effect displayed in response to the revariation display changes from the final display mode. By obtaining or drawing lots, the display mode (for example, "gold", "red", "green", "blue") in the middle of the predetermined production is determined.
The display means is characterized in that the display mode determined by the effect control means is displayed in response to the re-variation display.

In the above configuration, an effect in which the background color can be changed according to the pseudo-ream is provided, the final display color of this effect is determined first, and the background color displayed in the middle is determined by lottery according to the final display color. It is possible. According to the above configuration, it is possible to randomly change the background color up to the final display color without changing the final display color, for example, even in the case of a high-speed pseudo-ream in which the pseudo-ream shows the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to bring diversity to the production accompanied by the pseudo-ren.

(Appendix L2)
In this game machine,
The first re-variation display time (for example, 3.5 s) in which the re-variation display is executed and the second re-variation display time (for example, 7 s) longer than the first re-variation display time are defined in advance.
The revariation control means performs a predetermined revariation display by combining the first revariation display time and the second revariation display time according to the number of executions determined by the execution number determination means. Display (for example, high-speed pseudo-ream),
The display means is characterized in that the display mode determined by the effect control means is displayed in response to the revariation display executed during the first revariation display time.

In the above configuration, when executing the pseudo-ream, it is possible to execute the high-speed pseudo-ream by combining, for example, 3.5s and 7s according to the determined number of executions. Therefore, according to the above configuration, the types of effects can be increased, and it is possible to bring diversity to the effects, so that the player's interest can be improved.
Further, since the background color can change when the pseudo-ream is executed in a short re-variation display time of, for example, 3.5 s, the interest in the high-speed pseudo-ream with a short re-variation display time is improved, and the effect accompanied by the pseudo-ream is improved. It is possible to bring diversity to.

(About Appendix M)
As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine is disclosed in which an effect that is easy to be executed differs depending on the effect mode that is being executed at that time (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143552).

However, with the above technology, even if the execution frequency of the effect is changed according to the effect mode, it is easy to estimate the execution frequency of the effect from the effect mode grasped by the player, and the effect to be executed is achieved. There is a problem that it is limited and the interest in the production is reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest in the production so as not to reduce the interest in the production.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(Appendix M1)
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A lottery related to the game is performed according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (for example, a starting prize), the identification information (for example, a special symbol) is changed according to the lottery result, and the display result of the identification information is predetermined. A main control means (for example, main CPU 71) capable of controlling a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to the special display mode (for example, a jackpot symbol display mode) is provided. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls the effect according to the lottery result by the main control means, and
As a gaming state controlled by the main control means after the end of the special gaming state, at least the number of times the predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, the number of fluctuations) may be a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100). A second gaming state that is a gaming state included in the ending condition (for example, a non-probable and time-saving gaming state) and a gaming state that has the same ending condition as the ending condition and is more advantageous than the first gaming state. A game state (for example, a probabilistic and time-saving game state) is provided.
The number of times the predetermined start condition is satisfied that the table used after the end of the special gaming state is satisfied after the end of the special gaming state among the plurality of tables associated with the variation pattern that can specify the variation time of the identification information. The unit is predetermined according to the execution result of the special gaming state, and
Up to the predetermined number of times, the table is defined so that the fluctuation pattern selectable by the main control means is the same in both the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the predetermined number of times is specified. In terms of the number of times, at least the table (for example, the gaming state) so that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control means differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state when the special gaming state is not won. Another feature is that a table for selecting a variation pattern) is specified.

In the above configuration, the number of fluctuations of the non-probable and short-time gaming state (“low time” and “low time”) and the probable and short-time gaming state (“high time” and “high time”) reaches 100 times, for example. Then, it ends when the time is shortened. Further, in these gaming states, the same fluctuation pattern can be selected until the number of fluctuations reaches 100, but if the jackpot is not won by the number of fluctuations of 100 (so-called loss), the number of fluctuations is 100. In the second round, for example, the fluctuation pattern of "00H05H" is selected in the case of the non-probability change and the time-saving game state, while the fluctuation pattern of, for example, "00H06H" is selected in the case of the probability change and the time-saving game state, and the fluctuation patterns different from each other are selected. Be selected.
In this way, if there is a loss at the end of each gaming state, different fluctuation patterns are executed according to the gaming state, and the fluctuation time will differ depending on the difference in the fluctuation pattern, so it has been controlled until then. It is possible to suggest which game state the game state is by the fluctuation time.
Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the playability of the player, such as when the game state after the end of the big hit is different, and to enhance the fluctuation time and the interest in the production.

(Appendix M2)
In this game machine,
The first gaming state is a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state in which the transition probability to the special gaming state is relatively low.
The second gaming state is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state in which the transition probability to the special gaming state is relatively high.
When the number of times the predetermined start condition is satisfied reaches the predetermined number of times, the main control means ends the time-saving gaming state, and the number of times the predetermined start condition is satisfied is a specific number of times greater than the predetermined number of times. When (for example, the number of fluctuations is 124) is reached, the high-probability gaming state is terminated.

In the above configuration, the high-probability gaming state continues after the end of the second gaming state. For example, in the case of a loss when the number of fluctuations is 100, it is possible to grasp which game state was in the fluctuation time of the identification information, and it is possible to grasp whether or not the game is in a high-probability gaming state. It is possible to improve the playability of the person and further enhance the interest in the variable time and the production.

(About others)
As a gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13801). However, since this pachinko gaming machine does not have the configuration and function as a gaming machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

1 Pachinko game machine 11 Speaker 13 Liquid crystal display device 13a Display area 23 Effect button 39 Displacement member 53 First prize opening 54 Second prize opening 54a Shutter 59A to 59E, 59e to 59h LED
71 Main CPU
201 sub CPU
205 Display control circuit 206 Voice control circuit 207 LED control circuit 208 Drive control circuit 2000 Button image 2010 Character

As an effect during the symbol variation display, a gaming machine is disclosed in which an effect that is easily executed differs depending on the effect mode that is being executed at that time (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-143552

However, with the above technology , even if the execution frequency of the effect is changed according to the effect mode, it is easy to estimate the execution frequency of the effect from the effect mode grasped by the player, and the effect to be executed is achieved. There is a problem that it is limited and the interest in the production is reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately selecting a production so as not to reduce the interest in the production.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The gaming machine of the present invention
A lottery related to the game is performed when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification information is changed according to the lottery result, and the game is played according to the display result of the identification information being a predetermined special display mode. A gaming machine equipped with a main control means capable of controlling a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
An effect control means that controls the effect according to the lottery result by the main control means, and
A plurality of tables including a first table and a second table associated with information capable of specifying the fluctuation time of the identification information are provided.
The main control means includes table information switching means capable of switching the plurality of tables based on the number of times the predetermined start condition is satisfied.
The table information switching means
A first table setting means capable of setting the first table after the end of the special gaming state, and
A second table setting means capable of setting the second table based on the fact that the predetermined start condition reaches the first number of times after the first table is set by the first table setting means.
A second table that can be set in the first table based on the fact that the predetermined start condition reaches a second number of times different from the first number of times after the second table is set by the second table setting means. 1 Table resetting means and
The first table is based on the fact that after the first table is set by the first table resetting means, the predetermined starting condition reaches a third number of times different from the first number of times and the second number of times. It is equipped with a second table resetting means that can be set in two tables.
The effect includes a first effect and a second effect having a higher expectation of shifting to the special gaming state than the first effect.
The effect control means can control such that the ratio of executing the second effect in the first table and the ratio of executing the second effect in the second table can be executed at different ratios. It is characterized by being.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately selecting a production so as not to reduce the interest in the production .

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform a lottery related to a game according to the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, change the identification information, and control the special gaming state that is advantageous to the player from the lottery result.
A plurality of production execution means that perform operations related to the execution of the production,
Based on a table in which the timing for transmitting information related to the execution of the effect is defined, each of the plurality of effect execution means is provided with a transmission means capable of transmitting information related to the execution of the effect.
As the type of the table, at least a first table group in which one table is used in one effect and a second table group in which a plurality of tables can be used in one effect are provided.
In the table of the first table group, it is possible to specify that the table of the second table group is referred to.
When the information related to the execution of the effect is stored in a predetermined area, the transmission means registers one table of the first table group corresponding to the information related to the execution of the effect, and uses the one table. The table of the second table group to be referred to is registered, and the information related to the execution of the effect is transmitted based on the registered table.
When the tables of the first table group are registered in order corresponding to the effect to be executed, even if the table of the first table group is destroyed, the table of the second table group is not discarded. A game machine featuring.

Images